Voice Processing System Installation Manual

Voice Processing System Installation Manual
Voice Processing System
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM KX-TVP50
POWER
Model No.
KX-TVP50
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Voice Processing System, Model KX-TVP50.
Please read this manual before installing, customising, or operating the Voice
Processing System.
Version 2
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic
KX-TVP50 Voice Processing System.
We are confident that it will provide your customer or client with many years of dependable
service.
This Voice Processing System was especially tailored for the environment of your country. For
example, it can be configured for English or other languages:
System prompts — Recorded by the factory in English
User 1 prompts — Record in any language you like
User 2 prompts — Record in any language you like
These prompts guide subscribers and non-subscribers through specific VPS operations.
However, we would like to stress that for outside callers who merely need to be guided to an
extension, a mailbox, or other destinations (e.g., a fax machine), they can be greeted by a
Custom Service. This supports many languages as there are 12 keys on a touchtone phone and
you can record up to 100 Custom Service menus. One twelfth of these menus can be recorded
in one language if you desire. Another twelfth can be recorded in another language, and so on.
Thus callers can be guided entirely in their native languages. For a multi-cultural country,
Custom Service is a truly powerful feature. Please see "Custom Service" in Appendix A
SYSTEM FEATURES for more details.
Note
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted.
• In this manual, there may be PBX model numbers which are not available in your country.
• Throughout this manual the term he or she, his or her may be used. In order to improve
readability rather than continually use he/she we have only used one of these terms. The
term he or she should be taken as being interchangeable.
This product is only for connection behind a suitable PBX and should not be connected directly
to the network.
This product complies with the essential requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC Radio and
telecommunications terminal equipment directive.
A copy of the manufacturers declaration of conformity to the essential requirements of the
R&TTE directive is available at the following web address:
http://doc.panasonic-tc.de
2
Installation Manual
List of Enhancements
Compared to the previous version of the KX-TVP50 Voice Processing System, this
model is enhanced by the following new features:
• Unlimited Message Length (for Two-Way Recording/Two-Way
Transfer)
Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way conversations of unlimited length into his
or another person’s mailbox. (See page 177)
• Company Greeting
Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet all incoming callers and to
provide relevant information. (See page 156)
• Remote Change of Company Greeting
The System Manager can, via an extension or an outside telephone, choose the
appropriate company greeting of each individual Time Service period (Day, Night,
Lunch, and Break) for each port and trunk (outside line) group. (See page 269)
• Delete Message Confirmation
Requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before he can erase a message left in his
mailbox. (See page 157)
• WCID Command
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must wait for the Caller ID after the
VPS has received an incoming call from the PBX. (See page 134)
• Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp
In the previous version, the same value was required for User 1 and User 2 Prompts.
In this product, a different value can be set up for User 1 and User 2 Prompts
respectively. (See page 229)
Installation Manual
3
Important Information
Important Information
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
• Read all the information contained in this manual.
• Follow all product warnings, cautions, and instructions.
• Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way. Do not connect this unit
to an extension cord.
• Mount the unit on a stable wall surface. Do not mount the VPS inside a separate enclosure
unless it is properly ventilated.
• Keep the unit free of dust, moisture, condensation, high temperature exposure (more than
40 °C) and vibration. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight.
• This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting. The proper
voltage and current required for this unit are listed on the product label.
• This unit is equipped with a 3-wire earth plug. The plug will only fit into a earth power
outlet. Do not modify this plug in any way. If it cannot be inserted into the outlet, have the
outlet replaced by a licensed electrician.
• If the unit malfunctions, disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by
reconnecting the telephone. If the telephone operates properly, have the VPS repaired by a
qualified service technician.
• Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning.
• Handle the unit carefully. Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock.
• Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or
damaged, if the cabinet is cracked or broken, or when the unit has been exposed to moisture,
has been dropped, or is not otherwise operating properly.
• Do not install the unit near water or moisture, heating appliances, or electrical noise
generating devices such as televisions, monitors, fluorescent lamps, or electric motors.
• Do not insert wires, pins, or any other material into the unit's vent slots or access points.
This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction.
• Do not block the vent slots and openings located on the front and top of the unit.
• Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded outlets could result in fire and/or electrical shock.
• Do not disassemble this product. Dangerous electrical shock could result. The unit must
only be disassembled and repaired by qualified service technicians.
• Do not use solvents, liquid cleaners, water, or abrasive powders to clean this unit. Use only
a damp soft cloth for cleaning.
• Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of
the leak.
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
4
Installation Manual
Important Information
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the back of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
For your future reference
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
DEALER’S TEL. NO.
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY
REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING
CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO
REGULATIONS.
Installation Manual
5
Important Information
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAINS DISCONNECT DEVICE,
ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Note
Before you start setting or changing system parameters, we recommend that you turn off the
Answer Mode with the OFLN command. While off, the power LED of the VPS will flash and
the VPS will not answer any incoming calls. After you finish programming, use the ONLN
command to turn on the Answer Mode (normal operation). Please see 7.2.1 Off-line Set
(OFLN) and 7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN) for more details.
Trademarks
• HyperTerminal is either a registered trademark or a trademark of HILGRAEVE,
INCORPORATED in the United States and/or other countries.
• IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the
United States.
• Procomm Plus is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DATASTORM
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. in the United States and/or other countries.
• Smartcom is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer
Products, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
6
Installation Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO.............................................................14
1.1.1 Why Voice Processing?...............................................................................................14
1.1.2 Basic Operations..........................................................................................................14
1.1.3 VPS Limitations ..........................................................................................................15
1.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND USE...............................16
1.2.1 System Administration ................................................................................................16
1.2.2 System Management ...................................................................................................16
1.2.3 Subscriber Use.............................................................................................................16
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS ........................................................................................................17
1.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................17
1.3.2 System Components ....................................................................................................17
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible?......................................................................19
1.3.4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements ........................................................21
1.3.5 Specifications ..............................................................................................................21
1.3.6 Hardware .....................................................................................................................21
1.3.7 Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities........................................................................21
1.3.8 Recommendations for System Configuration .............................................................21
1.4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION.........................................................................................23
1.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................23
1.4.2 APT Integration ...........................................................................................................23
1.4.3 Connection Example — APT Integration ...................................................................23
1.4.4 DPT Integration ...........................................................................................................23
1.4.5 Connection Example — DPT Integration ...................................................................24
2
INSTALLATION
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................................................................................26
2.1.1 Installation ...................................................................................................................26
2.1.2 Wiring..........................................................................................................................26
2.2 UNPACKING ...............................................................................................................27
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL .......................................................................28
2.4 FRAME EARTH CONNECTION..............................................................................30
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS ............................................................................................31
2.6 INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD.........................33
2.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................33
2.6.2 Installing the KX-TVP52/KX-TVP54.........................................................................33
2.7 CONNECTIONS ..........................................................................................................35
2.7.1 Connecting to the PBX................................................................................................35
2.7.2 Opening the Ferrite Core .............................................................................................35
2.7.3 Connection for APT Integration..................................................................................36
2.7.4 Connection for DPT Integration..................................................................................36
2.7.5 Connection for Non-APT/DPT Integration .................................................................37
2.8 TERMINAL CONNECTION......................................................................................38
2.8.1 Requirements for Connecting the Programming Terminal .........................................38
2.8.2 Connecting the RS-232C Cable...................................................................................38
2.8.3 RS-232C Signals .........................................................................................................40
Installation Manual
7
Table of Contents
3
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE
SYSTEMS
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION....................................................................... 42
3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband Signalling? ................................................................................ 42
3.1.2 Why Integration is Important ..................................................................................... 42
3.1.3 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate ................................................................. 42
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration ............................................................................. 43
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS ....................................................... 45
3.2.1 General Guidelines and Definitions ........................................................................... 45
3.2.2 RS-232C Settings ....................................................................................................... 45
3.2.3 Port Settings................................................................................................................ 45
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters .......................................................................................... 46
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs................ 49
3.3.1 KX-TVP50 Programming for Inband Integration ...................................................... 49
3.3.2 KX-TA series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager's Extension .... 50
3.3.3 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 and KX-TD612 Programming for Inband Integration via the
Manager's Extension ................................................................................................. 52
4
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA
ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION .................................................... 54
4.1.1 Why Digital Integration is Important ......................................................................... 54
4.2 CONNECTING THE KX-TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA series....... 56
4.2.1 KX-TA series Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the
Manager's Extension ................................................................................................. 56
4.3 CONNECTING THE KX-TVP50 WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KXTD1232 AND KX-TD612........................................................................................... 62
4.3.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the
Manager's Extension ................................................................................................. 62
4.4 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP
PROCEDURES .......................................................................................................... 67
4.4.1 Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming .................................................................. 67
4.4.2 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment .................................................... 67
4.4.3 Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment...................................... 67
4.4.4 Live Call Screening Button Assignment .................................................................... 68
4.4.5 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment ........................................................ 69
4.4.6 Live Call Screening Password Assignment................................................................ 70
4.4.7 Live Call Screening Password Cancellation............................................................... 70
4.4.8 Live Call Screening Password Control....................................................................... 70
4.4.9 TWR (Two-Way Recording) into One's Own Mailbox ............................................. 71
4.4.10 TWR (Two-Way Recording) Button Assignment.................................................... 71
4.4.11 TWT (Two-Way Transfer) into Mailbox ................................................................. 72
4.4.12 TWT (Two-Way Transfer) Button Assignment ....................................................... 72
4.4.13 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment.................................................................. 73
5
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.1 STARTING UP ............................................................................................................ 76
5.1.1 Before Programming .................................................................................................. 76
5.1.2 Quick Setup ................................................................................................................ 76
8
Installation Manual
Table of Contents
5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup..............................................................................................77
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS .......................................................................................85
5.2.1 Custom Service Setting Example ................................................................................85
5.2.2 Custom Service Features .............................................................................................86
5.2.3 Custom Service Programming.....................................................................................88
5.2.4 Recording Menus.........................................................................................................91
5.2.5 Checking Operation.....................................................................................................91
5.2.6 Voice Mail ...................................................................................................................91
5.2.7 Mailbox Groups...........................................................................................................92
5.2.8 Extension Groups ........................................................................................................92
5.2.9 Interview Service.........................................................................................................93
5.2.10 Automated Attendant.................................................................................................94
5.2.11 Department Dialling Service .....................................................................................94
5.2.12 Operator Service........................................................................................................94
5.3 SETTING PORTS ........................................................................................................95
5.3.1 Port Service Menu .......................................................................................................95
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS.......................................................97
5.4.1 Automated Attendant Menu ........................................................................................97
5.4.2 Department Dialling ....................................................................................................97
5.4.3 Operator's Parameters..................................................................................................97
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES...........................................................................................101
5.5.1 Mailbox Setting Menu...............................................................................................101
5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox ....................................................................................................101
5.5.3 Deleting a Mailbox ....................................................................................................105
5.5.4 Password Reset..........................................................................................................105
5.5.5 Mailbox Listing .........................................................................................................105
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER..............................................................................106
6
FINAL SETUP
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)............................................108
6.1.1 Accessing the Message Manager's Mailbox..............................................................108
6.1.2 Main Menu of Message Manager's Service ..............................................................108
6.1.3 Company Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,1)....................................................................109
6.1.4 Recording the Company Name (Enter #6*998,5,2) ..................................................109
6.1.5 Custom Service Greetings (Enter [#6*998,5,4]) .......................................................109
6.1.6 Customising User Prompts (Enter [#6*998,5,6]) ......................................................110
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES ....................................................................................111
6.2.1 Recording Personal Greetings ...................................................................................111
6.2.2 Recording the Owner's Name....................................................................................111
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM..................................................................................113
7
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 INITIALISING THE SYSTEM ................................................................................116
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS............................................................................................118
7.2.1 Off-line Set (OFLN) ..................................................................................................119
7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN) ..................................................................................................119
7.2.3 Set Password (PASS) ................................................................................................119
7.2.4 Set Time (TIME) .......................................................................................................120
7.2.5 Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET) ...................................................................121
Installation Manual
9
Table of Contents
7.2.6 Error Log Display (ELOG)....................................................................................... 121
7.2.7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE) .......................................... 124
7.2.8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD).................................................... 126
7.2.9 Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN)................................................................. 127
7.2.10 Program Version Display (VERS) ......................................................................... 127
7.2.11 Custom Service Report (CREP) ............................................................................. 128
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR).............................................. 129
7.2.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL)........................................................ 130
7.2.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL).......................................................... 130
7.2.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT) ............................................................................... 131
7.2.16 Utility Command List (HELP) ............................................................................... 132
7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET)............................................................................................... 132
7.2.18 Circuit Condition Display (LMON) ....................................................................... 133
7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD) ............................................................... 133
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID) .................................................................................... 134
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS................................................................................................. 135
7.3.1 Mailbox Assignments ............................................................................................... 135
7.3.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments ....................................................................... 136
7.3.3 System Service Report.............................................................................................. 138
7.3.4 Call Account Report ................................................................................................. 138
7.3.5 Port Usage Report..................................................................................................... 139
7.3.6 Port Usage Statistics Clear ....................................................................................... 140
7.3.7 Flash Memory Usage Report.................................................................................... 140
7.3.8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear....................................................................... 141
7.3.9 Mailbox Usage Report.............................................................................................. 142
7.3.10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear............................................................................... 143
7.3.11 Fax Call Report....................................................................................................... 143
7.3.12 Fax Call Statistics Clear ......................................................................................... 144
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE.............................................................................. 145
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 148
Appendix
A1
A
SYSTEM FEATURES
SYSTEM FEATURES............................................................................................... 150
Appendix
B
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B1
B2
B3
SYSTEM NAVIGATION.......................................................................................... 180
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - MAILBOXES.................................................... 184
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................ 191
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - PORT/TRUNK SERVICE ............................... 201
B4.1 Port Assignment........................................................................................................ 201
B4.2 Trunk Group Assignment ......................................................................................... 203
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SERVICE SETTINGS...................................... 206
B5.1 Automated Attendant Parameters ............................................................................. 206
B5.2 Custom Service ......................................................................................................... 213
B5.3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters ........................................................................... 216
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS ............ 218
B6.1 System Group Assignment ....................................................................................... 218
B6.2 Time Service ............................................................................................................. 221
10
Installation Manual
Table of Contents
B6.3 Holiday Setting ..........................................................................................................225
B6.4 Daylight Saving Time (DST).....................................................................................228
B6.5 Prompt Setting ...........................................................................................................228
B6.6 System Caller Name Announcement.........................................................................229
B6.7 Other Parameters........................................................................................................231
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - HARDWARE SETTINGS ................................243
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters..................................................................................................243
B7.2 Port Setting ................................................................................................................244
B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters..........................................................................................245
Appendix
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S MAILBOX ......................................254
SETTING UP MAILBOXES.....................................................................................255
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS ....................................258
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK..........................................................................265
CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING ...................................................267
CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING .......................................269
CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS)........................................271
DELIVERING MESSAGES......................................................................................273
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S MAILBOX ................................276
LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES.........................................277
Appendix
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
C
D
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX...................................280
MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX ......................................281
SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION.......................................283
CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX .............................286
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK..........................................................................289
RECORDING MESSAGES ......................................................................................291
REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET ..................................................................296
LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE ...........................299
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.......................................................................302
Glossary ............................................................................................... 353
Index .................................................................................................... 365
Installation Manual
11
Table of Contents
12
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Section 1
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual
13
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1.1
Why Voice Processing?
The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls. When a call comes in, it answers, forwards to
appropriate extensions, takes and stores messages, and notifies subscribers when messages are
left. Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system. The
VPS is easy to use, helping callers through the system with step-by-step voice prompts.
Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services, VPS messages are
confidential; they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber's password.
Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy, which are commonly lacking with
written messages. The messages come directly from the caller, in the caller's own voice. To
further ensure accuracy, the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before
saving them. Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient.
1.1.2
Basic Operations
Greeting Callers:
Callers are greeted by a pre-recorded message that includes directions for leaving and editing
messages. The VPS can list single-digit numbers for each available extension or mailbox.
Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the extension
number at any time. Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a pre-programmed destination
(which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox) to leave a message.
Sending Messages:
Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailbox. Subscribers can send
messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once. The message sender can then verify
that the other subscriber has received the message.
Receiving Messages:
There are several different message notification methods that subscribers can use. They can
choose to be notified by message waiting lamp, beeper (pager), or a call from the system to
another line. System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time
a message is left (Subscribers can choose to receive message notifications differently
depending on the time of day.), Mailbox parameters detemine the number of messages 5-100,
and the maximum length of messages. If the system is connected using DPT Integration,
subscribers can press a pre-assigned button to record conversations into their own mailboxes
or other subscriber’s mailboxes while talking on the phone. DPT Integration also allows
subscribers to screen messages as they are being left, and intercept them if required.
14
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1.3
VPS Limitations
The KX-TVP50 does not support:
UCD functions
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions
and returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy. Calls can be forwarded by the KXTVP50 to the KX-TD1232/816/612 floating number of a UCD group. The call then rings at the
next available phone.
The KX-TVP50 supports UCD functions with very limited capabilities. Because the incoming
call is forwarded as an intercom path and not a DIL (direct in line), the following items will
not work:
• time table
• overflow function
• DISA message from a DISA card
• IRNA
Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the KXTVP50's standard functions. We do not recommend these systems for integration with the
KX-TVP50. The section 1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible? explains problems
with compatibility.
Installation Manual
15
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2
1.2.1
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION,
MANAGEMENT, AND USE
System Administration
System Administration is accomplished by the installer and is concerned with setting and
changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems. System Administration is
accomplished using terminal emulation software.
1.2.2
System Management
Two system functions are performed by the customer: System Management and Message
Management.
System Management concerns changing system parameters through the System Manager’s
Mailbox.
Message Management concerns recording voice prompts through the Message Manager’s
Mailbox. These messages include Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialling
menu, Custom Service menus, voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists, user prompts,
multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names.
Be sure to set a password to the System Manager's Mailbox and the Message Manager's
Mailbox to protect system security against hackers and dial through fraud.
1.2.3
Subscriber Use
System users are called subscribers. Subscribers are assigned a personal mailbox that they are
able to personalise. Subscribers can record their name, record personal greetings, set covering
extensions, record questions for an interview mailbox, set the message reception mode, set
incomplete call handling status, set call transfer status, enter Personal Group Distribution Lists,
set the message waiting lamp, and set notification by calling.
Each subscriber can set a password of up to 10 digits to his own mailbox. It is strongly
recommended that each subscriber set a password, which will prevent unauthorised callers
from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscriber's mailboxes.
16
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3
SYSTEM BASICS
1.3.1
General
The KX-TVP50 is initially configured with 2 ports and 2 h of storage.
1.3.2
System Components
Main Cabinet
MODE (DIP Switch)
AC Inlet
Power Indicator
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM KX-TVP50
POWER
Port 1
Port 2
Ferrite Core
Earth Terminal
RS-232C Connector
Note
EIA port is at SELV.
Port 1 and Port 2 are at TNV.
Inside View of the Main Cabinet
Memory Card
Position for Optional Expansion Memory Card
Installation Manual
17
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Components
AC Inlet:
Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated for the VPS.
Power Indicator:
Indicates system status — when flashing, the system is off-line (not ready to receive calls).
MODE (DIP Switch):
(Check the status of this switch only at start-up.) Provides the following additional functions:
Table 1
Position
Additional Function
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Normal setting. (All switches in 0 position.)
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Initialises RS-232C parameters.
RS-232C default parameters: 9,600, N, 8, 1
2*1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and
all ports are set for Automated Attendant service.
3*1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and
all ports are set for Voice Mail service.
4
5
Reserved.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
6-7
8
Reserved.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
9
18
Initialises the VPS. Clears all voice data (except
User 1 and User 2 prompts) and returns all system
parameters to the default setting.
Initialises the VPS. Clears all voice data and
returns all system parameters to the default setting.
This makes more recording time available —
about 1 h — if User Prompts have been recorded.
CAUTION: User 1 and User 2 Prompts are
erased!
Reserved.
10*2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and
all ports are set for Automated Attendant service.
11*2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and
all ports are set for Voice Mail service.
12
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
All service prompts are set to System Prompts.
13
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
All service prompts are set to User 1 Prompts.
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Table 1
Position
0
0
0
0
14
15
Additional Function
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
All service prompts are set to User 2 Prompts.
Reserved.
*1
For Panasonic KX-TD series telephone systems with DPT
Integration
*2
For Panasonic KX-TA series telephone system with APT
Integration.
To change the position, use an electrical or jewellers screwdriver.
Note
When setting the DIP switch to any position (except 0), first disconnect the extension
wire(s) and wait a few minutes, then disconnect the AC cord from the VPS. Set the DIP
switch and connect the AC cord to the VPS; wait approximately 3.5 min and then return
the DIP switch to position 0.
Earth Terminal:
This terminal should be connected to a earth source with less than 1
resistance.
RS-232C Connector:
Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS; must be used to program system.
Memory Card:
(1/system) Stores the proprietary system program, and the voice prompts (about 30 min worth);
has the capacity to record approximately 2 h of messages from callers.
Optional Expansion Memory Card:
The KX-TVP52 can expand the flash memory capacity by 2 h. The KX-TVP54 can expand the
flash memory capacity by 4 h.
1.3.3
Which Phone Systems are Compatible?
We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems:
• Panasonic KX-TD1232
• Panasonic KX-TD816
• Panasonic KX-TD612
• Panasonic KX-TA series
Installation Manual
19
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
We cannot guarantee adequate integration of the KX-TVP50 with other PBX systems or with
Key Systems. If the customer does not have one of the recommended Panasonic PBX
systems, be sure that the system has the features listed below.
The PBX should have the following features for successful integration:
• Single line (tip/ring) port circuits (Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this
connection.)
• Extension to extension touchtone signalling
• Message Waiting Notification from an SLT (single-line telephone)
• Screened transfer from an SLT
• Message Waiting Notification on proprietary (multi-line) sets (message waiting lamp
accessed by dialling on/off codes)
If the PBX does not have these features, VPS operation will be limited.
See 3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration. You will find the following information about
each feature listed:
• Description
• Limitations of the system without the feature
• Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature
VOICE MAIL
The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow-on ID and Inband Integration. When
callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail, Follow-on ID sends
callers directly to the mailbox. Without Follow-on ID, the caller would have to re-enter the
mailbox number when connected to the Voice Mail.
Touchtone Integration enables the VPS to recognise the current state of the call and improve
its call handling performance. When enabled, the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) by sending a code with touchtones before sending the normal
call progress tones. For example, when a caller hangs up before making a selection, the PBX
sends # 9 to the VPS port that answered. This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up.
Upon receiving these digits, the VPS goes on-hook and is ready to handle another call.
Digital (APT/DPT) Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX-TA
series PBX or to a Panasonic KX-TD series PBX (depending on the software version). This
digital integration provides the VPS with more information than Touchtone Integration. This
information enables the system to identify the extension number of the caller, know where the
call is forwarded from and why, and recognise what the caller wants to do. Some features are
available only with APT/DPT Integration (Remote Call Forwarding Set, Live Call Screening,
Two-Way Recording, Two-Way Transfer, Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging, Auto
Configuration, Caller Name Announcement [system/personal], Caller ID Call Routing,
Personal Greeting for Caller ID, Time Synchronisation with PBX).
20
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3.4
Installer Equipment and Software Requirements
The installer must have a laptop computer or data terminal equipped with terminal emulation
software. We suggest you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE. The computer
is used to program the VPS. Terminal emulation software enables the keyboard to be used as
a data entry device.
While both the laptop and data terminal will work, the laptop allows screens to be saved in a
file throughout the process. It is often helpful to retrieve these files later if technical support is
needed.
1.3.5
Specifications
Table 2
Ports: 2
Voice Storage: 2h (expandable)
Custom Services: 100
Message Retention: 1 to 30 days or unlimited
Number of Mailboxes: 30 subscriber mailboxes
2 manager mailboxes
Number of Messages per Mailbox: 100 maximum (programmable)
1.3.6
Hardware
•
•
•
•
•
1.3.7
1 Flash Memory Card
1 Optional Flash Memory Position for KX-TVP52/KX-TVP54 card
2 Telephone Inputs (RJ11C)
1 RS-232C Connector
1 DIP Switch (4-bit)s
Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities
Expansion of the flash memory capacity requires an optional expansion memory card (KXTVP52/KX-TVP54). The KX-TVP50 initially has 2-h memory. The KX-TVP52 increases the
capacity by 2 h. The KX-TVP54 increases the capacity by 4 h.
1.3.8
Recommendations for System Configuration
General guideline: a ratio of 6/1 (for every 6 lines, 1 port). There are 2 questions to ask when
considering how many ports are desirable:
Installation Manual
21
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded/transferred calls?
• If they are answering incoming calls, how busy are the lines?
The guideline above (6/1) usually works well with moderate traffic. This may have to be
modified for heavy traffic. These recommendations are outlined in the following chart.
Table 3
Exchange lines
Port
1-6
1
7-12
2
One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 exchange lines. The
following recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy
traffic.
Table 4
22
Exchange lines
Port
1-4
1
5-8
2
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4
DIGITAL INTEGRATION
1.4.1
General
There are 2 types of Digital Integration: APT Integration and DPT Integration.
APT Integration is available when the KX-TVP50 is connected to a KX-TA analogue PBX.
DPT Integration is available when the KX-TVP50 is connected to a KX-TD digital PBX.
1.4.2
APT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-TA analogue PBX, the VPS ports look like proprietary telephones. The
PBX thinks that the VPS is a proprietary telephone, and the VPS mimics all actions of a
proprietary telephone. Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital
integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire connections for each port
(TVP50). To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through APT Integration, the PBX
and VPS must be programmed to work together.
1.4.3
Connection Example — APT Integration
For example, you can connect jack 7 of the KX-TA series PBX to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4wire connection (see diagram below). This connection creates 1 Voice Mail extension and can
only answer 1 call. This means that a fully-configured 2-port system requires 2 jacks from the
PBX.
KX-TVP50
KX-TA series
7
Port 1
Extension 107
8
Port 2
Extension 108
When APT Integration is activated, a single extension jack provides 1 single-line interface at
a Port on the VPS. For example, when 1 line cord (4 wire) is connected to Port 1 on the VPS,
1 extension is provided.
1.4.4
DPT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-TD digital PBX, the VPS ports look like digital extensions. The PBX
thinks that the VPS is a digital phone, and the VPS mimics all actions of a digital set. Another
advantage of digital integration is that the 2B+D communication provides 2 VPS ports for each
Digital Extension port. Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital
integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire connections for each port
Installation Manual
23
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(TVP50). To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration, the PBX
and VPS must be programmed to work together.
1.4.5
Connection Example — DPT Integration
For example, you can connect jack 15 of the KX-TD1232 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4-wire
connection (see diagram below). This connection creates 2 Voice Mail extensions and can
simultaneously answer 2 calls. This means that a fully-configured 2-port system requires only
1 jack from the PBX.
KX-TVP50
KX-TD1232
15
Port 1
Extensions 265 and 266
When DPT Integration is activated, 2 speech paths are available using only one port on the VPS
and PBX. For example, when 1 line cord (4 wires) is connected to Port 1 on the VPS, the
equivalent of 2 extensions are connected to the one port.
24
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
Section 2
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual
25
INSTALLATION
2.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS.
2.1.1
Installation
The VPS needs to be installed on the wall. Improper placement of the system may result in
malfunction, noise, or discolouration. Avoid installing the VPS in the following places:
• in direct sunlight; in hot, cold, or humid places
• in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. (where sulphuric gas may damage the
equipment or contacts).
• where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
• in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit.
• near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines, elevators or electric
welders.
• on or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment; near microwave ovens or air
conditioners. (Ideally, the VPS should not be in the room with these items and should be
at least 1.8 m away from televisions.)
Do not obstruct the areas around the PBX and the VPS. Both require space above for cooling
and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection.
2.1.2
Wiring
• Do not wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source, computer, etc. If cables
are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and
earth the shields.
• Use protectors if running cables on the floor. Avoid running wire under carpets.
• Avoid sharing an AC power supply for computers, telexes, and other office equipment with
the VPS. Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS operation.
When making any connections or removing the cover, be sure the power switch is turned off.
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
26
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
2.2
UNPACKING
Unpack the box and check the items below.
Table 5
Main Unit
1
AC Cord
1
Screws (Wall Mounting)
3
Washers (Wall Mounting)
3
Installation Manual
27
INSTALLATION
2.3
MOUNTING THE VPS ON A WALL
The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS. If
screws other than the ones supplied are used, use screws that are the same size as the enclosed
ones.
Mounting on a Wooden Wall
1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
Template
;;
;;
2. Install the 3 screws (included) into the wall.
Wooden
Wall
Drive the screw
to this position.
3. Hook the unit on the screw heads.
28
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar Wall
1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
2. Drill 3 holes and drive the rawlplugs (user-supplied) with a hammer, flush to the wall.
To the wall surface
Rawlplug
Concrete Wall
6.4 mm
29 mm
3. Install the 3 screws (included) into the rawlplugs.
Drive the screw
to this position
4. Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Installation Manual
29
INSTALLATION
2.4
FRAME EARTH CONNECTION
IMPORTANT!!!
Connect the frame of the main unit to the earth.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert the earth wire.
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the earth wire to the earth.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM KX-TVP50
POWER
To earth
30
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
2.5
INSTALLATION STEPS
The following is an overview of the standard installation process using APT/DPT Integration.
When necessary, other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed
descriptions or instructions.
1. Get a list of current users, their extension numbers, their departments, and the type of
systems they use (mailbox, no mailbox, beeper (pager), car phone...).
2. Assess your customers' needs before setting up the system. You will save yourself time later
by giving customers what they need up front. Ask the office manager how the VPS will be
used. Give examples.
Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings. You will find
these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes down
the road.
3. Standard initialisation (For APT/DPT Integration Connection)
a) Program the ports of the PBX for voice processings (See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD
DIGITAL PBX).
Program the KX-TA series, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TD816 or the KX-TD612 for
Voice Mail integration.
• KX-TA series
• KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TD612
Programming may be performed on-site or at the office.
All memory is stored and will be retained providing the DIP switches are in
position [0] when power is applied to the unit.
b) Unplug the power cord of the VPS.
c) Plug extension wire(s) from the PBX into VPS (See 2.7 CONNECTIONS).
d) Connect the computer to the VPS with a Null Modem Cable (See 2.8.2 Connecting the
RS-232C Cable).
e) Set the DIP switch to position 5.
f) Plug the power cord of the VPS.
g) Wait until the "warning" appears on the screen.
h) Set the DIP switch back to position 0.
CAUTION
If the DIP switch is not reset to position 0 after initialisation, all programming will be lost
when the voice processor loses power!
Installation Manual
31
INSTALLATION
4. Perform Quick Setup. (See Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM)
5. Check Quick Setup:
• The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid.
• The screen output should be: [On Line].
If you do not see the "On Line" message, check the following:
• The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors.
• The programming on the KX-TA series is correctly set in system Program [130], or
[130] and [131].
• The programming on the KX-TD816/1232 is correctly set in System Program [126]
or [117].
• The programming on the KX-TD612 is correctly set in System Program [126].
6. Set up Class of Service (COS) for each user. customise voice prompts if necessary. (See
Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE)
7. Perform Administrative Programming through a computer. (See Appendix B SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE)
CAUTION
Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause malfunction.
To turn the power off after installing the VPS, unplug the power cord from the VPS a
few minutes after disconnecting all extension wire(s).
32
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
2.6
2.6.1
INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION
MEMORY CARD
General
The flash memory capacity of the VPS can be increased if an optional expansion memory card
is installed.
• The KX-TVP52 card will increase the flash memory capacity of the VPS from 2 h to 4 h.
• The KX-TVP54 card will increase the flash memory capacity of the VPS from 2 h to 6 h.
2.6.2
Installing the KX-TVP52/KX-TVP54
1. Disconnect the extension wire(s). Wait a few minutes then disconnect the AC cord from the
VPS.
2. Take out the screw.
Screw
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM KX-TVP50
POWER
3. Remove the cover by pressing both tabs and lifting up.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM KX-TVP50
POWER
Installation Manual
33
INSTALLATION
4. Take out the screws and remove the metal bar.
Screws
Metal Bar
5. Attach the optional expansion memory card firmly. Secure the screw.
Screw
SLAVE
CAUTION
Do not attach the optional expansion memory card at the "MASTER" position. Attach it at the
"SLAVE" position.
6. Replace the metal bar and secure the screws.
Screws
7. Replace the cover and secure the screw.
8. Connect the AC cord again.
34
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
2.7
CONNECTIONS
2.7.1
Connecting to the PBX
The KX-TVP50 can be connected to up to 2 extension ports of the PBX. Use a 4-conductor
wire for connection with KX-TA systems that uses APT Integration, and for connection with
KX-TD systems that use DPT Integration. Use a 2-conductor wire for connection to all other
PBXs.
4-Conductor Wire
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
Modular Connection
B:
R:
G:
Y:
2.7.2
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Outer Pins
Inner Pins
Opening the Ferrite Core
Insert a flathead screwdriver into each opening of the ferrite core and unlatch the cover as
shown below.
Connect a 4-conductor wire or 2-conductor wire to the KX-TVP50 and run the wire through
the ferrite core (see following pages). Close the ferrite core.
Installation Manual
35
INSTALLATION
2.7.3
Connection for APT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the KX-TVP50
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 1
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 2
To KX-TA series
Extension Jacks 07 and 08
(or 15 and 16)
To Extension
Port of the PBX
2.7.4
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
Connection for DPT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the KX-TVP50
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 1
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 2
To KX-TD1232/816/612
Any Extension Jack except Jack 01
To Extension
Port of the PBX
36
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
2.7.5
Connection for Non-APT/DPT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the KX-TVP50
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 1
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 2
To Extension Ports of
Non-APT/DPT Integration PBX
To Extension
Port of the PBX
G
R
Installation Manual
G
R
37
INSTALLATION
2.8
TERMINAL CONNECTION
2.8.1
Requirements for Connecting the Programming Terminal
The programming terminal must be connected using a serial cable with an RS-232C connector
to the RS-232C port. This must be a null modem cable. This enables system administration
(system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis) to be performed.
Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory:
Table 6
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
2.8.2
Baud Rate:
9600 bps
Word Bit Length:
8 Bits
Parity:
None
Stop Bit Length:
1 Bit
Connecting the RS-232C Cable
RECOMMEND:
Before connecting the cable, make sure the power switches on both the data terminal and
the VPS are OFF.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM KX-TVP50
POWER
Connect the RS-232C cable to the VPS.
The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m.
38
Installation Manual
INSTALLATION
9-pin Cable Printer/IBM ® -PC
KX-TVP50 (9 pin)
Circuit
Signal
type
name
(RS-232C)
Pin
no.
Pin
no.
Signal
name
Circuit
type
(RS-232C)
BB
RXD
2
2
RXD
BB
BA
CD
TXD
DTR
3
4
3
4
TXD
DTR
BA
CD
AB
CC
SG
DSR
5
6
5
6
SG
DSR
AB
CC
7
8
RTS
CTS
CA
CB
KX-TVP50 (9 pin)
Circuit
Signal
type
name
(RS-232C)
Pin
no.
Pin
no.
Signal
name
Circuit
type
(RS-232C)
1
3
FG
RXD
AA
BB
2
TXD
BA
20
7
DTR
SG
CD
AB
5
6
8
CTS
DSR
DCD
CB
CC
CF
BB
RXD
2
BA
CD
TXD
DTR
3
4
AB
CC
SG
DSR
25-pin Cable Printer/PC
5
6
Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Pin
Number
Signal Name
Circuit Type
RS-232C
CCITT
1
2
FG
TXD
Frame Ground
Transmitted Data
AA
BA
101
103
3
4
RXD
RTS
Received Data
Request To Send
BB
CA
104
105
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
CC
107
Installation Manual
39
INSTALLATION
Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Pin
Number
2.8.3
Signal Name
Circuit Type
RS-232C
CCITT
7
8
SG
DCD
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
AB
CF
102
109
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
CD
108.2
RS-232C Signals
Frame Ground (FG)
Connects an external ground to the unit frame, usually the earth pin of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data (TXD)—output
Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal/printer. A "mark" condition is held unless data
or BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data (RXD)—input
Conveys signals from the terminal/printer to the unit.
Request To Send (RTS)—output
This lead is held on whenever DSR is on.
Signal Ground (SG)
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)—output
This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that the RS-232C is on line. Circuit DTR
ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal/printer. It is
switched off when the RS-232C is off-line.
40
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Section 3
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH
PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual
41
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
3.1
GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1.1
APT/DPT or Inband Signalling?
There are 3 types of integration available on the KX-TVP50: Inband Signalling, APT and DPT.
The VPS used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment.
KX-TA series PBX can use APT Integration. KX-TD series PBX can use DPT Integration.
3.1.2
Why Integration is Important
The KX-TVP50 works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a
standard single-line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the VPS operation depends on the
capabilities and features provided by the PBX; its performance will vary when connected with
different PBX systems. For example, Follow-on (or Called Party) ID is a feature of the PBX.
If the PBX does not have this feature, the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct
mailbox and play the busy or no-answer greeting for that mailbox.
3.1.3
How the VPS and the PBX Communicate
To the PBX, the VPS looks like an SLT. The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT, and the VPS
mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT.
For the VPS and the PBX to communicate, proper signalling is important. Like an attendant,
the VPS places calls by going off-hook and dialling numbers. It starts call transfers with a flash
(recall) to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number. By recognising call progress
tones from the PBX, the VPS decides how calls should be handled. Inband Integration allows
the PBX to send certain digits (touchtone) to the VPS, allowing it to recognise the status of the
extension and take the appropriate action.
Table 8
VPS/PBX COMMUNICATION
PBX to VPS
VPS to PBX
Call Progress Tones
• ringback
• busy
• reorder
SLT Signals
• on/off hook
• flash (recall)
• touchtones
Touchtones
The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features. For example, if the VPS takes a
message, one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialling the PBX's Message-WaitingLamp-On code. Once new messages are retrieved, the VPS dials the Message-Waiting-LampOff code for that same mailbox owner.
42
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
3.1.4
PBX Requirements for Integration
The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS. (Although this
section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX, it may be necessary to refer to the PBX's
documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions.)
Single Line (Tip/Ring) Port Circuits
The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLTs. Some PBXs need an OPX card
to provide this connection. However, some OPX cards do not provide all the capabilities listed
in this section.
Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply:
Table 9
Minimum Loop Current
20 mA
Minimum Line Voltage
7 V DC
Minimum Ringing Voltage
40 V AC
Extension to Extension Touchtone Signalling
For system users to access VPS services and features, they must be able to send touchtones
from their telephones to the VPS port. As a general rule, SLTs can perform extension-toextension touchtone signalling; however, many proprietary telephones cannot. Some PBXs
need to be programmed to make proprietary telephones use touchtone signalling.
If the PBX does not provide extension-to-extension touchtone signalling, VPS services and
features will be limited.
TEST:Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question. When the call
is answered, see if the person receiving the call hears touchtones when
numbers are dialled.
Message Waiting Notification from an SLT
The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive broken dial tone when the MessageWaiting-Lamp-On code is dialled by the VPS. The VPS functions best when the extension
number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light-On or Light-Off code. On some PBXs,
however, the extension number is dialled first, followed by a flash (recall) and then the On
code. This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the flash
(recall) signal.
If the PBX does not provide message waiting notification from an SLT, the VPS can only
notify mailbox owners by dialling a beeper (pager) or user-assigned extension number.
Installation Manual
43
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
This process slows down VPS performance as it dials the beeper (pager) or extension number
and waits to confirm notification. The beeper (pager) or user-assigned extension notification is
meant to be used for necessity, usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office (e.g.,
sales people or field representatives). The only other option, without message waiting
notification, is for mailbox owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages.
TEST: See if dialling the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension's
message waiting indicator.
Screened Transfer from an SLT
The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly.
A screened transfer:
1. Puts the caller on hold, usually with a flash (recall).
2. Dials the extension.
3. Checks to see if the called subscriber is in, out, or on another line, and whether or not that
subscriber accepts the transfer.
4. Completes the transfer (by going on-hook) or returns to the caller to say that the party is
busy or not available. It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message.
If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT, the VPS cannot give callers the
option to leave a message in a subscriber's mailbox.
TEST: Place an outside call from an SLT. See if you can set up a screened
transfer to another extension. Next, try the same test with an internal call.
(The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls.)
Follow-on ID or Called Party ID
When forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS, a PBX with Follow-on ID sends the mailbox
number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller. The VPS responds by
playing that subscriber's personal greeting. This operation is sometimes called Call Forward to
Mailbox. Without this feature, the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when the line is
busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message.
44
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
3.2
PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2.1
General Guidelines and Definitions
Optimal performance of the VPS/PBX system relies on proper VPS programming. There are
3 categories of hardware settings: RS-232C, Port Settings, and PBX Interface Parameters.
Entering a number sets some of the parameters, while others use sequence codes.
3.2.2
RS-232C Settings
• Baud Rate (300 - 38400): Specifies the bits-per-second (the speed at which the data is
transferred).
• Word Bit Length (7 - 8): Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
• Parity (N, O, E): Specifies the parity used for error detection.
• Stop Bit Length (1 - 2): Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte.
• Default: 9600, 8, N, 1
3.2.3
Port Settings
There is no need to change these in a typical installation. Only change these parameters when
the KX-TVP50 is connected to a PBX other than a KX-T series. Each port on the VPS should
be matched to the type of signalling the PBX expects. If you need to change these settings, refer
to the PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings.
• Flash (Recall) Time—100 ms, 300 ms, 600 ms, 900 ms:
The minimum amount of time that the PBX requires to recognise a flash (recall) signal.
Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX's setting.
• CPC Signal (Calling Party Control Signal)—NONE, 6.5 ms, 150 ms, 300 ms, 450 ms,
600 ms:
The amount of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate
that the caller has hung up; usually set to NONE, since most PBXs do not provide this
signal to single line ports. If choosing a setting other than NONE, use an amount equal
to or less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal.
• Disconnect Time—1 s - 8 s:
The amount of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended.
• Dial Mode—Touchtone, Pulse 10 pps, Pulse 20 pps:
The type of signalling the PBX single line port expects to receive. (pps = pulses per
second)
Installation Manual
45
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
3.2.4
PBX Interface Parameters
Dialing Parameters
• PBX Type:
Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS.
• Integration Mode:
Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX. If PBX type is set
to the Panasonic KX-T series, the Inband Signalling parameters are set automatically and
should not be altered. APT Integration is only available when a KX-TA series PBX is
connected and the software is upgraded. DPT Integration is only available when a KX-TD
series PBX is connected and the software is upgraded.
Table 10
SEQUENCE CODES
D
Disconnect
F
Flash (Recall)
R
Ring Detection
S
Silence Detection
T
Dialtone Detection
W
Wait for 1 Second
X
Dial Extension
A:
Answer
0-9,
,#
Touchtone Digits
• Operator Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator.
Example: FTX [recall—dial tone—dial (operator) extn.]
• Extension Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension.
Example: FTX [recall—dial tone—dial extn.]
• Alternate Extension (Transfer Sequence):
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that is entered into the "Alternate
Extension Group." This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure (i.e.,
blind transfer) such as modem extensions.
Example: FTXD [recall—dial tone—dial extn.—hang up]
• Reconnect Sequence on Busy:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the extension the caller has dialled is busy. PBXs
differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
• Reconnect Sequence on No Answer:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the extension the caller has dialled does not
46
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
•
•
•
•
•
answer. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the
sequence.
Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the extension dialled has Call Screening enabled
and the subscriber chooses not to take the call. PBXs differ in how they handle this function.
Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at
an extension.
Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at
an extension.
Call Waiting Sequence:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the extension being
called is busy. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine
the sequence.
Release Sequence for Call Waiting:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting. PBXs differ in how they
handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Inband Signalling
These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband. If the PBX type is set
to a KX-T series system, these parameters will be automatically set. If another type PBX is
used, check that system's installation manual for settings.
Table 11
Code
(default)
Call State
Sent to the Voice Mail Port When...
1
Ringback Tone
The extension dialled is ringing.
2
Busy Tone
The extension dialled is busy.
Reorder Tone
An invalid extension number is dialled or the call is
inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port (also
heard when no touchtone receiver is available to the Voice
Mail extension).
4
DND
The extension dialled has set DND (Do Not Disturb).
5
Answer
The extension dialled is answered.
Forwarded to
Voice Mail
(Ringing)
The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and
another Voice Mail port is able to answer. (This lets the first
Voice Mail port, usually an Auto Attendant, send the call to
the other Voice Mail port.)
3
6
Installation Manual
47
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Table 11
Code
(default)
Call State
Sent to the Voice Mail Port When...
7
Forwarded to
The extension dialled is forwarded to Voice Mail and no
Voice Mail (Busy) other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call. (This
signals the Voice Mail port [usually Auto-Attendant] to let
the caller leave a message.)
8
Forwarded to Extn. The extension dialled is forwarded to another, non-Voice
Mail extension.
9
Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp
Off code is dialled successfully.
Disconnect
#9
The caller disconnects. The local exchange must send a
CPC signal to the PBX for this feature to work on outside
calls.
Digit Translation Table Parameters
These parameters allow PBXs that have a fixed Follow-on ID sequence to be used with the
KX-TVP50. For example, a Follow-on ID sequence of [
201] can be changed to [#6201]
by using these parameters.
• Inter-Digit Time-Out: This parameter defines the duration of incoming signals
(Follow-on ID) from the PBX to the VPS. The Digit Translation Table is applied to the
digits received within this time.
• Input-Output (up to 8 alphanumeric characters): When the system receives digits
within the inter-digit time, it checks them against the input table. If they are found, the
system utilises the output digits in their place.
The Remainder of this section consists of step-by-step guides for software verification
and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems.
48
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
3.3
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.1
KX-TVP50 Programming for Inband Integration
Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal. The table below lists recommended
parameters for Panasonic KX-T series PBXs.
Table 12
PBX Type
Other
T308/
Manufacturers T616
T1232
T96
Integration Mode
Inband
None
Inband
Operator Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on No
Answer
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
T336
TA
series
Inband
Inband
Inband
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Light-On
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
*
N/A
T701X# T#91X T 9X
T701X
T701X
T701X#
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
*
N/A
T702X# T#90X
T#9X
T700X
T700X
T702X#
Call Waiting
Sequence
*
N/A
N/A
2
1
2
Installation Manual
1
Inband Inband
TD816/ TD308
1232/612
N/A
49
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Table 12
PBX Type
Other
T308/
Manufacturers T616
Release Sequence
for Call Waiting
*
N/A
T1232
T96
T336
F
N/A
N/A
TD816/ TD308
1232/612
F
F
TA
series
F
*
Check with manufacturer.
N/A
Not Available
(A)
Adding "A" for "answer" to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message:
"You have a call" when the AA transfers a call. The VPS disconnects when the call is
answered. Adding "D" for "disconnect" creates a blind transfer.
3.3.2
KX-TA series Programming for Inband Integration via the
Manager's Extension
1. Enable System Program [102] for each extension connected to the VPS. Jack 07, or jacks
07 and 08 can be assigned for VPS1 as the Voice Mail port. Jack 15, or jacks 15 and 16 can
be assigned for VPS2.
This parameter is used to tell the KX-TA series which extensions are connected to the VPS.
Ports with this parameter enabled can send Follow-on ID and touchtone call status
Signalling (busy, answered, disconnect, etc.) if the Voice Mail integration and Touchtone
Integration features are also enabled.
2. Enable System Program [103] to turn on Touchtone Integration. On extensions with the
Voice Mail port parameter enabled, the KX-TA series can send codes (touchtones) to
indicate call states; this increases VPS efficiency. Codes apply to all transferred calls:
outside calls only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-TA series is programmed for CPC
Detection and the Local Exchange sends the CPC signal). Refer to the Table 11 in Section
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters.
3. Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program
[600].
Reserve this extension group for these extensions! Do not mix other extensions into this
group.
NOTE
Up to two KX-TVP50 units can be connected to the KX-TA series. When two KX-TVP50
units are connected to the KX-TA series, 2 different extension groups should be assigned
one for each KX-TVP50 in System Program [600]. One extension group is for jack 07, or
jacks 07 and 08 of the KX-TA series. The other extension group is for jack 15, or jacks
15 and 16.
50
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
4. Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Program [100].
5. Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Program [101].
6. At every VPS extension, temporarily connect an SLT or butt set, go off-hook and dial
7301# to turn on Data Line Security. This prevents the KX-TA series from sending
Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions. We recommend that all
Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording.
7. Select the appropriate exchange line feature settings depending on how your customer plans
to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup, or C) to only
answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended exchange line feature settings:
a) If the KX-TVP50 is answering all incoming calls:
Exchange Line Mode — Use System Programs [414](Day Mode), [415](Night
Mode), [416](Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to the first
extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA series will allow incoming
outside calls to hunt only if the exchange lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt
group. Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt.
b) If the KX-TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator
Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment — For each applicable exchange line, use System
Programs [408](Day Mode), [409](Night Mode) and [410](Lunch Mode) to enable
ringing at the operator's extension(jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment — To give the operator time to answer the call before
the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each
extension connected to the KX-TVP50. Use System Programs [411](Day Mode),
[412](Night Mode) and [413](Lunch Mode).
Exchange Line Mode — Set the mode for each applicable exchange line to Normal.
Use System Programs [414 ](Day Mode), [415](Night Mode) and [416](Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
c) If the KX-TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment — For each applicable exchange line, use System
Programs [408](Day Mode), [409](Night Mode) and [410](Lunch Mode) to enable
ringing on every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment — To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension
connected to the KX-TVP50. Use System Programs [411](Day Mode), [412](Night
Mode) and [413](Lunch Mode).
Exchange Line Mode — Set the mode for each applicable exchange line to Normal.
Use System Programs [414](Day Mode), [415](Night Mode) and [416](Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
Installation Manual
51
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
CAUTION
DO NOT create a mailbox in both VPS for the same extension. Each extension can have a
maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS. The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension
from the VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice
Mail Transfer. DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS. For example, if
jack 06 (extension 106) has its mailbox in the VPS1, assign extension 107 or 108 as the
destination, not extension 115 or 116 (see the following diagram).
Extension 106
6
KX-TVP50 (VPS1)
Port 1
Extension 107
Port 2
Extension 108
7
KX-TA series
8
Group A
Mailbox for Extension 206
KX-TVP50 (VPS2)
15
16
Port 1
Extension 115
Port 2
Extension 116
Group B
3.3.3
KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 and KX-TD612 Programming for
Inband Integration via the Manager's Extension
Select a maximum of 2 extension ports to be connected to the VPS. Plug each extension into a
Voice Mail port.
Go into System Program [602] and assign the Voice Mail extensions to a different extension
group. By default, all extensions are in Extension Group 1. Go into System Program [106] and
assign the new Extension Group to Auto Attendant (AA). Then go into System Program [813]
and assign a floating number to the new Extension Group.
If your PBX is KX-TD612, KX-TD816-3, KX-TD1232-3 or higher software version, program
as follows. Go into System Program [131] and enter the Voice Mail extensions into a hunting
group. Go into System Program [106] and assign the hunting group to Auto Attendant (AA).
Then go into System Program [813] and assign a floating number to the hunting group.
52
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
Section 4
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND
KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
Installation Manual
53
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
4.1
GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.1.1
Why Digital Integration is Important
The KX-TVP50 works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a
standard single line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the communication between the
PBX and VPS is best when Digital Integration is used; the KX-TVP50 is already set up to
communicate through Digital Integration.
Once Digital Integration is established, the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data
link. This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling, know where a
call is forwarded and why it's forwarded, and recognises what the caller wants to do. This
communication allows features that are only available with Digital Integration, several of
which are described below.
Table 13
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES
54
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration only)
The subscribers and the Message Manager can
program their extensions from a remote location to
forward various types of calls to a desired extension or
an outside telephone.
Auto Configuration
The VPS knows what extension numbers exist on the
PBX and creates mailboxes for each extension
automatically. Also sets the VPS clock with data from
the PBX clock.
Live Call Screening
Extension users can monitor messages as they are
being left in the mailbox and intercept if required.
Two-Way Recording
Extension users can record conversations in their own
mailboxes by pressing one button.
Two-Way Transfer
Extension users can record conversations in another
person's mailboxes by pressing a button and dialling
an extension number.
Direct Mailbox Access
The subscriber is entered directly into his mailbox
when he calls the VPS. He does not have to dial his
mailbox number.
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
Each PBX trunk group can be assigned one of 4
incoming call services: Voice Mail Service,
Automated Attendant Service, Interview Service and
Custom Service.
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
Table 13
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES
Intercom Paging*
Callers can page subscribers through built-in speakers
and external paging equipment. For a Caller ID Caller,
if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature, the name will be announced at
the end of the page.
Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal)*
A pre-recorded announcement of the Caller ID callers'
name is heard when extension users listen to messages
left in their mailbox and/or calls are transferred from
the VPS to the users.
Caller ID Call Routing*
The VPS automatically sends calls from pre-assigned
Caller ID numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
or Custom Service.
Personal Greeting for Caller ID* Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting
messages for special callers.
* Caller ID Note 1: When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the PBX,
the VPS will wait about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the Caller
ID information properly from the PBX.
This waiting time can be changed by using the WCID command (see
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID) in 7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS).
Caller ID Note 2: In the documentation for the KX-TD816/1232/612 series
PBX, the Caller ID feature is called CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation).
The KX-TVP50 System comes from the factory already set up for a KX-TA series PBX. When
the power is turned on for the first time, the VPS will try to communicate with the KX-TA
series PBX through Digital Integration. For this reason, several things should be done before
operating for the first time.
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX (see 3.1.1 APT/
DPT or Inband Signalling?), you may not be able to utilise some of the features listed above.
For more information, consult your dealer.
Installation Manual
55
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
4.2
4.2.1
CONNECTING THE KX-TVP50 WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA series
KX-TA series Software Verification and Programming for
Digital Integration via the Manager's Extension
It is important that the KX-TA series has the proper software level to allow Digital Integration
with the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TA series Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system
programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Check the software version of the KX-TA series using System Program [998].
Example: Y581PYYMMDD(M)
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
Digital Integration, the software version of the PBX must be Y581P or higher.
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, consult your dealer.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [998].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE). The system displays the ROM version and the
date it was created.
This version must be Y581P or higher for Digital Integration to be utilised.
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
Date and time are automatically synchronised between the VPS and the Panasonic KX-TA
series during initial setup.
3. Set extension numbering using System Program [009].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jacks will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those
ports. Jack 07, or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail Port. Jack
15, or jacks 15 and 16 can be assigned for the VPS2.
• KX-TVP50 (2 ports): assign max. 2 jacks
56
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
Extension
group 7
KX-TVP50 (VPS1)
7
Port 1
8
Port 2
KX-TA series
KX-TVP50 (VPS2)
15
Port 1
16
Port 2
Extension
group 8
From the SYS-PGM NO ?screen:
a) Enter [130] (for VPS1) or [131] (for VPS2).
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Disable
c) Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER).
Screen output: Port 7 or Port 15
d) To assign 2 jacks, Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) again.
Screen output: Port 7& 8 or Port 15& 16
To assign 1 jack, skip this step.
e) Press STORE.
f) Press END (HOLD).
Conditions:
The lowest jack (jack 07 or jack 15) entered here must
be connected to Port 1 of the VPS.
To change the current assignment from "Port 7" to
"Port 7 & 8", you must first change it to "Disable".
Likewise, if you want to change it from "Port 7 & 8" to
"Port 7", you must first change it to "Disable". If the
current assignment is already "Disable", you can make
a change in 1 step. This condition also applies to System
Program [131].
When "Port 7 & 8" is selected in program [130],
extension jack numbers 07 and 08 will be in extension
group 7 automatically. Likewise, when "Port 15 & 16"
is selected in program [131], extension jack numbers 15
and 16 will be in extension group 8 automatically. Also
the Extension Hunting type is set as "Circular"
automatically in each of these 2 extension groups.
5. Select the appropriate exchange line feature settings depending on how your customer plans
to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup, or C) to only
answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended exchange line feature settings:
Installation Manual
57
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
a) If the KX-TVP50 is answering all incoming calls:
Exchange Line Mode—Use System Programs [414](Day Mode), [415](Night
Mode), [416](Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to the first
extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA series will allow incoming
outside calls to hunt only if the exchange lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt
group. Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt.
b) If the KX-TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator
Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each exchange line, use System Programs
[408](Day mode), [409](Night Mode) and [410](Lunch Mode) to enable ringing at
the operator's extension(jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment — To give the operator time to answer the call before
the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the KX-TVP50. Use System Programs [411](Day Mode), [412](Night
Mode) and [413](Lunch Mode).
Exchange Line Mode — Set the mode for each exchange line to Normal. Use
System Programs [414 ](Day Mode), [415](Night Mode) and [416](Lunch Mode) to
set this parameter.
Table 14 2 Exchange Lines, 2 Ports
Exchange Lines
Ports
1
1, 2
2
1, 2
c) If the KX-TVP50 is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment — For each exchange line, use System Programs
[408](Day Mode), [409](Night Mode) and [410](Lunch Mode) to enable ringing on
every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment — To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the KX-TVP50. Use System Programs [411](Day Mode), [412](Night
Mode) and [413](Lunch Mode).
Exchange Line Mode — Set the mode for each exchange line to Normal. Use
System Programs [414](Day Mode), [415](Night Mode) and [416](Lunch Mode) to
set this parameter.
6. Connect the jack(s) assigned in Step 3 to the KX-TVP50.
7. Connect your laptop computer to the KX-TVP50 and start your communication software
(i.e., HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
8. Disconnect the power from the KX-TVP50 and set the DIP switch on the KX-TVP50 to
position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
58
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
CAUTION
Setting the DIP switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System, resulting in a
loss of all user programming, and voice messages (except User 1 and User 2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the KX-TVP50 and wait approximately 3.5 min while the system
initialises.
"System Administration" Start-Up Sequence
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
• The Power Indicator light goes on.
• The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
• "Checking Flash Memory Cards." is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3...
• The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the ports
until "1...2...3..." is displayed.
• Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message is shown when the digital (APT) connection between the VPS and
telephone system cannot be established. This is normal. This message appears because
the PBX type for the VPS is not a KX-TA series system. Since the default PBX type is
set to the KX-TD816/1232/612 at the factory, this message will always appear. To
change the default, go to the System Administration Top Menu, and Type1-6-3-1.
(Program - Hardware Settings - PBX Interface Parameters - Dialing Parameters Menu).
Select "2:KXT Series" and then "7:TA series" at the "1. PBX Type", and select "3:APT"
at the "2. Integration Mode".
Exit the menu by entering "\", and the following display will be shown.
Installation Manual
59
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
Screen output:
** OFF LINE MODE **
If "APT Interface Connection is not Established" is still shown, possible causes
are:
Table 15
Cause
Action
The cabling between the PBX
Confirm the cabling is
extension ports and the VPS is not 4- connected as described in
wire or is improperly connected.
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a KX-TA series but does Consult your dealer or use
not have the proper level of software Inband Integration under
required to support APT Integration. hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly Do required integration
to support APT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
10.Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system's condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11.If you have not done so already, adjust the VPS parameters to your PBX. Follow these
steps.
a) Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 7. Power up again.
b) Select your country PBX (see computer screen).
c) Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 0. Power up again.
12.Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
60
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
CAUTION
When 2 VPSs are connected to the KX-TA series, the following 2 procedures should be done
to make the VPSs work correctly.
1. Delete a mailbox in either VPS so that each extension has only ONE MAILBOX.
After Auto Configuration has been executed, an extension has a mailbox in both
VPS1 and VPS2. However each extension can have a maximum of 1 mailbox in
either VPS. To delete a mailbox, Type [D] (Delete) in the "Make (Make/Delete)"
field (see "Step 4 Creating Mailboxes" in 5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup).
The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the VPS which contains
its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer. DO
NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS. For example, if jack 06
(extension 106) has its mailbox in the VPS1, assign extension 107 or 108 as the
destination, not extension 115 or 116 (see diagram below).
2. Change the extension numbers of both VPS port 1 and 2 for VPS2 from 107 and
108 to 115 and 116 (see "Extension Number of VPS Port 1" and "Extension
Number of VPS Port 2" in Table 72 in B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters).
Extension 106
6
KX-TVP50 (VPS1)
Port 1
Extension 107
Port 2
Extension 108
7
KX-TA series
8
Mailbox for Extension 206
KX-TVP50 (VPS2)
15
16
Port 1
Extension 115
Port 2
Extension 116
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [107]. If the VPS
answers, you have an APT connection.
Set the DIP switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TA series should be able to
communicate through Digital Integration.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM) from the
VPS, the PBX transmits the extension information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
Installation Manual
61
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
4.3
CONNECTING THE KX-TVP50 WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 AND KXTD612
Note
Do not use system programs [106], [131], [602] or [813] for DPT Integration. The following
Section (4.3.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration
via the Manager's Extension) is for the KX-TD1232 as examples. Please refer to them for the
KX-TD816 and KX-TD612.
4.3.1
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
Digital Integration via the Manager's Extension
It is important that the KX-TD1232 has the proper software level to allow Digital Integration
with the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TD1232 Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system
programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Verify Software - If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, remember to check both
cabinets. The software must be the same in each. Check the software version of the KXTD1232 using System Program [116].
Example: P111GYMMDDA
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day).
Note
The following features are not available in case the software version of the PBX is
lower than the required version.
• Trunk Service
• Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal)
• Caller ID Call Routing
• Personal Greeting for Caller ID
If these features cannot be used, confirm your PBX software version and consult
your dealer.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [116].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
62
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
c) Enter the system number ([0] or [1], master/slave). The system displays the ROM
version and the date it was created.
This version must be higher than the required version for Digital Integration to be
utilised (both systems if system connection is used).
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
Date and time are automatically synchronised between the VPS and the Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone systems during initial setup.
3. Set extension numbering using System Program [003].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those
ports.
• KX-TVP50 (2 ports): assign 1 jack
Note
If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, all Voice Mail Ports should be assigned to
either the Master or Slave System.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [126] or [117].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: M: # # #
c) Enter the jack number of the port you will use for the Voice Mail (02 - 64).
d) Press STORE.
e) Press END (HOLD) when finished.
Conditions:
Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port. A jack
programmed as a Manager Extension (System Program
[006]) cannot be used in this program.
5. Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering.
System Program [127] or [118] (Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) is
automatically set. This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice
Mail port. Since the jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions, this enables you
to assign extension numbers to each port. You can assign any extension number that is
not already assigned to another port. To reach the VPS, users dial these extension
numbers. It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 265
and 266 (or 165 and 166).
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [127] or [118].
Installation Manual
63
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM NO?
c) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM-01:#_ _ -1: 265 (or 165)
( _ _ = the port number you entered in program 126 or 117)
d) Enter the extension number that you want this port to have.
(The default extension number for port 1: 265 (or 165); port 2: 266 (or 166))
e) Press STORE.
f) Repeat c, d, and e until all extension numbers are entered.
Conditions:
No 2 jacks on the system can have the same extension
number. If you try to enter a number that is already
assigned, you will hear an error tone. Each digital
extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and
must have 2 different extension numbers assigned.
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 3 to the KX-TVP50.
7. Connect your laptop computer to the KX-TVP50 and start your communication software
(i.e., HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
8. Disconnect the power from the KX-TVP50 and set the DIP switch on the KX-TVP50 to
position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Set the DIP switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System, resulting in a loss
of all user programming, and voice messages (except User 1 and User 2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the KX-TVP50 and wait approximately 3.5 min while the system
initialises.
"System Administration" Start-Up Sequence
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
• The Power Indicator light goes on.
• The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
• "Checking Flash Memory Cards." is displayed on the screen.
64
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3...
• The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the ports
until "1...2...3..." is displayed.
• Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message is shown when the digital (DPT) connection between the VPS and
telephone system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not Established"
Table 16
Cause
Action
Change the PBX type by using
The PBX is not a KX-TD series
system. Since the default PBX type for Quick Setup (see Section 5).
the KX-TVP50 is to KX-TD816/
1232/612 at the factory, this message
will always appear when connecting
to another type of PBX.
The cabling between the PBX
Confirm the cabling is
extension ports and the VPS is not 4- connected as described in
wire or is improperly connected.
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a KX-TD series but does Consult your dealer or use
not have the proper level of software Inband Integration under
required to support DPT Integration. hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly Do required integration
to support DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
Installation Manual
65
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system's condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11.If you have not done so already, adjust the VPS parameters to your PBX. Follow these
steps.
a) Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 7. Power up again.
b) Select your country PBX (see computer screen).
c) Disconnect the power to the VPS and set the DIP switch to position 0. Power up again.
12.Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [265] or [165]. If the
VPS answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the DIP switch to position 0 after initialisation is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able to
communicate through Digital Integration.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM)
from the VPS, the PBX transmits the extension information automatically. This saves time
when programming the VPS.
66
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
4.4
COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION
FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
The following features can be used on any KX-T proprietary telephone (7000/7300/7700 series
analogue; 7200/7400/7500 series digital). KX-T7000/KX-T7300/KX-T7700 series are used
with the KX-TA624. The KX-T7200/KX-T7400/KX-T7500 series are used with the KX-TD
series.
4.4.1
Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming
LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes. The notification method is
programmable for hands-free or private. Hands-free allows the user to monitor a recording
through the speakerphone and, if desired, intercept the call by lifting the handset. The private
mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded. By pressing the
LCS button, the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off-hook. System
Programming also determines whether the mailbox continues to record after the user intercepts
the call.
4.4.2
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
This program allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the
extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening.
1. Enter [620] (for KX-TA series) or [617] or [616] (for KX-TD series) from system program.
2. Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Jack No.?
3. Enter a jack number.
Screen output: # _ _ :Stop Rec
(_ _ = the jack number you entered)
4.
5.
6.
7.
4.4.3
Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) until the desired selection is displayed.
Press STORE.
Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Repeat 4, 5, and 6 until all jacks are programmed.
Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment
This program assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox. It
determines whether an alert tone is sent and whether the recorded message is played through
the built-in speaker of the extension. The default mode is hands-free. (This is station level
programming and should be done at each individual phone.)
Installation Manual
67
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
Enter PITS programming:
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the code for the mode you want this phone to have.
Hands-Free = #11(for KX-TA series) or 11 (for KX-TD series)
Private = #12 (for KX-TA series) or 12 (for KX-TD series)
Screen output: Hands-Free or Private
3. Press STORE.
4. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
5. Repeat these steps at each telephone.
Conditions:
None
For the KX-TD series only:
A single-line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone can
also be used to monitor an incoming message. Be sure that Live Call Screening on the
connected proprietary telephone has been activated. This feature is useful when you are using
a cordless telephone. The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being
recorded. To intercept the call, hang up and go off-hook.
4.4.4
Live Call Screening Button Assignment
For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have an LCS
button on it and the button must be lit at the time of the message. This button must be either a
DSS/BLF or line key (must have a lamp). Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button
on an extension. (This is station level programming and should be done at each individual
phone.)
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (Line or DSS/BLF) key you want to assign as the LCS button.
68
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
3. Press [92] (for KX-TA series) or [85] (for KX-TD series).
Screen output: LCS
4. Press STORE.
5. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
4.4.5
This button must be assigned and lit for LCS to operate.
To light this, press the button and enter the LCS
password (see 4.4.6 Live Call Screening Password
Assignment).
Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment
This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible (Line, DSS) key as a Live Call
Screening Cancel button.
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the Flexible (Line, DSS) key you want to assign as a Live Call Screening Cancel
button.
3. Press [93] (for KX-TA series) or [86] (for KX-TD series).
Screen output: LCS Cancel
4. Press STORE. The STORE indicator light turns on.
The display shows the initial programming mode.
5. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional; Live Call Screening can also
be cancelled by Pressing the FLASH (RECALL) button.
Installation Manual
69
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
4.4.6
Live Call Screening Password Assignment
To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have the
LCS button lit. To light this button on the phone, press the LCS button, then enter the password.
This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the messages
as they are being left. (It is not necessary to enter Station Programming to activate this feature.)
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Press the feature number [77 ] (for KX-TA series) or [799]
(for KX-TD series).
3. For KX-TA series
Enter any password of 3 digits ([000] - [999]) twice and #.
For KX-TD series
Enter any password of 3 digits ([000] - [999]) twice.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: The password you entered is displayed.
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
4.4.7
Live Call Screening Password Cancellation
To cancel the password, follow the procedure below. (It is not necessary to enter Station
Programming to activate this feature).
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Press the feature number [77 ] (for KX-TA series) or [799]
(for KX-TD series).
3. For KX-TA series
Enter the password of 3 digits ([000] - [999]) once and #.
For KX-TD series
Enter the password of 3 digits ([000] - [999]) once.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: Password Cancel
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
4.4.8
Live Call Screening Password Control
This feature allows Operator(s) and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS
at any extension. If a user forgets the pre-programmed password, Operator(s) and the Manager
of the PBX can cancel the LCS password.
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
70
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press [#2] (for KX-TA series) or [03] (for KX-TD series).
Screen output: Ext NO?
3. Press the extension number. Or press [ ] key to remove all passwords (for KX-TD series
only).
4. Press STORE.
5. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "Set".
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
4.4.9
TWR (Two-Way Recording) into One's Own Mailbox
This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their own mailboxes by
pressing the Two-Way Recording (TWR) button.
4.4.10
TWR (Two-Way Recording) Button Assignment
For the Two-Way Recording feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWR
button on it. This button must be either a DSS/BLF or line key (must have a lamp). Follow the
procedure below to assign a TWR button on an extension. (This is an extension level program
and should be done at each individual phone.)
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (Line or DSS/BLF) key that you want to assign as the TWR
button.
3. Press [90] (for KX-TA series) or [83] (for KX-TD series).
Screen output: 2WAY-REC:
4. Enter a Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2WAY-REC: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
Installation Manual
71
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
6. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
4.4.11
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF button to be
programmed as a TWR button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will hear
reorder tone.
TWT (Two-Way Transfer) into Mailbox
This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person's mailbox
by pressing the Two-Way Transfer (TWT) button followed by the mailbox number. This is
commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants the
message recorded in the mailbox at the same time.
4.4.12
TWT (Two-Way Transfer) Button Assignment
For the Two-Way Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWT
button on it. This button must be either a DSS/BLF or line key (must have a lamp). Follow the
procedure below to assign a TWT button on an extension. (This is an extension level program
and should be done at each individual phone.)
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (Line or DSS/BLF) key that you want to assign as the TWT
button.
3. Press [91] (for KX-TA series) or [84] (for KX-TD series).
Screen output: 2WAY-TRANS:
4. Enter a Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2WAY-TRANS: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
72
Installation Manual
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
4.4.13
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF button to be
programmed as a TWT button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will hear
reorder tone.
Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment
This feature is used to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox. It can be used with APT/DPT
or Inband Integration.
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA series
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-TD series
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the Program button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (Line or DSS/BLF) key that you want to assign as the VTR
button.
3. Press [94](for KX-TA series) or [82](for KX-TD series).
Screen output: VTR
4. Enter a Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: VTR- _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. Exit the program mode:
For KX-TA series
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-TD series
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Installation Manual
73
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA ANALOGUE PBX AND KX-TD DIGITAL PBX
74
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Section 5
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual
75
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.1
STARTING UP
5.1.1
Before Programming
1. Determine the customer's needs.
• Work with the owner, manager, and receptionist to build the Custom Service
Greetings, and Holiday Greetings.
• Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings.
• Check the software level of the telephone switch.
2. Use "System Administration" and your computer for the startup sequence.
3. After the system is "on line," disconnect the exchange lines going into the system until the
greetings have been completed.
4. Work with the receptionist to record the system greetings.
• It's important to spend time training the receptionist. Making sure that the
receptionist understands the system and can answer basic questions will save you
time in the end.
• Show the receptionist how to transfer "general delivery mailbox messages."
5.1.2
Quick Setup
Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items. Each of these must
be initially set to start the VPS operation.
Note
Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
76
PBX type
Extension numbers of VPS ports
Extension numbers for mailboxes
Creating mailboxes
Port service setting
Password setting
Date and time setting
Activating the Quick Setup
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Depending on your PBX type, some steps will be skipped as shown below.
Table 17
PBX Type
5.1.3
Required Procedures
KX-T308/T616
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
KX-T123210
T336/T96
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Non-Panasonic System
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
KX-TD816/1232/612/308/
TA series
1
4
5
6
8
8
Starting the Quick Setup
The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect. If you press "\", you will have
to start over. Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data (for example,
when adding a slave system).
At the System Administration Top Menu, Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then QSET
and Press ENTER (see 7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET)).
Screen output:
System Administration Top Menu
5
3
QSET
Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems
This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate
in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system. The system will prompt you to enter, modify or
confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select.
By entering the appropriate information in the following screens, the system sets PBX
integration parameters, identifies the extension numbers connected to it, creates default
mailboxes, sets its ports to handle callers with automated attendant or voice mail service,
sets system passwords and sets the time and date. Finally, it confirms that you want to
activate the system based on the information you entered, modified, or confirmed.
To proceed, press ENTER. To exit and cancel Quick Setup now, press [\].
Installation Manual
77
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
1. PBX Type
a) Press ENTER.
Screen output:
Quick Setup - PBX type
Please select your PBX type.
1. KX-T308/KX-T616
2. KX-T1232
3. KX-T96
4. KX-T336
5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232
6. KX-TD308
7. KX-TA series
8. KX-TD612
0. OTHERS
b) Select your PBX type. The required steps are different for some models. Go to the step
indicated below for that type.
Table 18
1. KX-T308/KX-T616
Go to Step 2.
2. KX-T123210, 3. KX-T96,
4. KX-T336, 0. Others
Go to Step 3.
5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232, 7. KX-TA series,
8. KX-TD612
Go to Step 4.
Note
APT Integration with the KX-TA series will be activated automatically by selecting "7.
KX-TA series", DPT Integration with the KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 or KX-TD612 will
be activated automatically by selecting "5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232" or "8. KXTD612".
APT/DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time and
date by transferring extension and time information from the PBX automatically.
78
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
2. Extension Numbers of VPS Ports
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Assigned extension No. of VPS Port
Please enter extension number of VPS.
1:
2:
Please enter extension numbers.
(2 digits) : =
S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2-digit numbers. This improves the VPS
integration with the KX-T308 or KX-T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate between
VPS extensions and non-VPS extensions.
Type [S] to go to the next screen.
3. Extension Numbers for Mailboxes
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Enter Extensions for Mailboxes
What extensions need a mailbox on this system?
1:210
6:215
11:220
16:225
21:230
26:235
2:211
7:216
12:221
17:226
22:231
27:236
3:212
8:217
13:222
18:227
23:232
28:237
4:213
9:218
14:223
19:228
24:233
29:238
5:214
10:219
15:224
20:229
25:234
30:239
Please enter extension numbers.
:=
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes (2-5 digits). For
example, to enter the extension number 201, Press [201] and Press ENTER. You can
also enter multiple extensions. Enter the extensions from No. 201 to No. 210 by
Pressing [201-210] and Pressing ENTER.
The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered. (See Step 4.)
Note
The VPS accepts any extension numbers within a 2 to 5-digit range. Up to 30
extension numbers can be entered.
Installation Manual
79
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
4. Creating Mailboxes
To go to the next screen (S) or to change the menu (P or N), the cursor must be in the
MBX column.
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Mailbox Editing
Extension and mailbox list Assigned 30
Ext
MBX Owner (Last Name)
•••
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
201
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
•
•
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
•
•
P: Previous menu,
N: Next menu,
Vacant 0
MAKE (Make/Delete)
Page 1/4
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
•
•
S: Next Screen
a) To create or discard mailboxes
In the "MAKE (Make/Delete)" field: Type [M] (Make) to create the mailbox; Type [D]
(Delete) to discard the mailbox. If there are more than 30 mailboxes, the first 30 of them
are displayed with "Make" and the rest are displayed with "Delete." (Screen Output:
[Assigned 30, Vacant 0])
To change the status of a mailbox from "Delete" to "Make," first change the status of a
mailbox from "Make" to "Delete." (Screen output: [Assigned 29, Vacant 1]) Then
change the status from "Delete" to "Make."
b) Owner's last name
Up to 16 alphabet characters can be assigned as an Owner's Last Name.
80
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Note
•Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen
Panasonic KX-TA Series and KX-TD Series Systems
The same numbers as the extensions of the KX-TA series and KX-TD series systems
that were automatically transmitted to the VPS — Auto Configuration.
Non-KX-TA Series and Non-KX-TD Series Systems
The same numbers as that of the extensions entered in step 3.
•The length of mailbox numbers
If both 3 and 4-digit extension numbers exist at one time, the VPS will unify all mailbox
numbers to 4-digit length by entering [0] at the end of all 3-digit numbers.
Example:
Extension
Numbers
Mailbox
Numbers
201
202
203
2000
2001
2002
201(0) *
202(0) *
203(0)*
2000
2001
2002
*The VPS puts [0] at the end of 3-digit numbers.
Note
After mailboxes for subscribers have been created by Quick Setup, the COS parameter
"Authorisation for Message Notification" (see Table 38 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION - SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS) for
COS number 1 will be set to "Yes". It will stay "No" for COS number 2 through
number 62.
To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner's Last
Name (or First Name), see 5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES. The caller can use "Dial by
Name" feature using the Owner's Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service or
Voice Mail Service.
Installation Manual
81
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5. Port Service Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup- Port Service Setting
All ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard Automated Attendant operation, day and night mode, using the Custom Service feature (Custom
1). You can change the operation to standard Voice Mail (Custom 2) or leave it
as Automated Attendant. If necessary, Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified
under the menu "Program -> Service Setting -> Custom Service."
PORT 1
PORT 2
Day Mode
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Night Mode
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
A: Auto. Attend., V: Voice Mail, S: Next Screen
Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1), Voice Mail (using Custom 2)
Incoming Call Services for all ports (Day/Night) can be defined by this setting. Default
values for all ports (Day/Night) are "Automated Attendant Service (Custom 1)." To
select other incoming call services, go to "Setting Ports."
6. Password Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup-Password Setting
System Administrator Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
System Reset/Clear Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset/Clear Password
in this screen, if necessary.
IMPORTANT
• We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum
protection against hackers and dial through fraud.
• Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
• Please change the password periodically (for instructions, see 7.2.3 Set Password
(PASS) in 7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS.)
To go to the next screen without assigning the password, Press ENTER.
82
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
7. Date and Time Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup-Time Setting
Current time is 3:04, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Current date is SAT 1-JAN- 1994
Enter new date (DD-MM-YY) : =
Enter the time (hour, minute as 2 digits, comma and A or P) and date (day, month and
year in 2 digits).
To go to the next screen, Press ENTER.
8. Activating the Quick Setup
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select "Yes."
To cancel and exit, select "No."
1: Yes
2: No
To activate the Quick Setup, Press [1]. The VPS begins to change system programming
data.
Screen output:
Quick-Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select "Yes."
To cancel and exit, select "No."
1: Yes
2: No
Setup 201
Selecting "No" in the above screen cancels all changes made to this point.
Then "PORT TEST." "SYSTEM SETUP..." and "1...2...3..." appear on the screen one by
one.
Screen output:
PORT TEST ...
SYSTEM SETUP ...
1 ... 2 ... 3 ...
Screen output when Quick Setup is finished:
**ON LINE MODE**
>
Press ENTER.
Installation Manual
83
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Screen output:
System Administration Top Menu
1 : Program
2 : System Reports
3 : Utility Command
4 : System Reset/Clear
5 : Quick Setup (VT100 Mode Only)
Enter the number : =
84
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.2
PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Design each system to suit the needs of the customer. You should be familiar with all options
for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect. Each port can be
assigned as Voice Mail, Interview Service, Automated Attendant, or Custom Service. Custom
Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the other services by
pressing one key. We recommend programming all ports as Custom Service for caller
convenience.
5.2.1
Custom Service Setting Example
Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail. Custom
Service offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location
quickly and easily.
Sample Company Greeting 1
"Thank you for calling the ABC company". (Company greeting should be short!)
Sample Custom Service Message
"Thank you for calling the ABC company. If you know the extension number of the person you
are calling, you can dial it at any time. For a list of extensions, Press [1]; to reach the sales
section, Press [2]; to reach the service section, Press [3]; if you would like to place an order,
Press [4]; all other callers, please wait and an operator will be right with you."
Sample Custom Service Tree
Create a tree to design a route leading callers to the desired extension, mailbox, or next menu.
This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers. Discuss
available options with the customer before programming the system.
Company Greeting
Custom Service
100
Main Greeting
all ports day
Custom 2
Extension List
Custom 3
Extension List
New Cars
Installation Manual
Transfer
to Service
Transfer
to Orders
Used Cars
85
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the
VPS. Then create a branch for each option. This should be done until each caller option has
been documented. Next, fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily
remember what action corresponds to each keystroke.
Remember that it is possible and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another
custom service. For example, if someone presses [1] for sales, you might want another menu
to say "for new car sales, press [1]; for used car sales, press [2]." This way, callers are routed
directly to the person best suited to handle them.
Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages
If you are an airline or travel agency, your callers might not be fluent in English. You can easily
accommodate several languages with Custom Service. For example, each key on the keypad
(there are 12 keys) could be assigned to a language. Record Custom Service Menu 100 so that
the caller can select a language with one-touch dialling. For example, the top menu could be:
"For English, press 1. For French, press 2. For Spanish, press 3. For German, press 4. For
Japanese, press 5. For Chinese, press 6... etc." (Of course, selections should be recorded in
their respective languages.)
At the next level, create menus in each language for Day Mode. For example, Custom Service
Menu 2 (the one for English callers) might be: "For departure information, press 1. For arrival
information, press 2. For reservations, press 3. To leave a message, press 4. To send a fax,
press 5." Thus at this level (or at an even lower level) a caller can be guided in his native tongue
to the right person (extension), the right message-taker (mailbox), or the right device (fax
machine).
In parallel, create menus in each language for Night/Lunch/Break Mode. For example, Custom
Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be: "Sorry, we are closed for the day. Our regular
business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. If you would like to leave a
message, press 1 now. If you would like to send a fax, press 2 now." Record a similar message
for the other languages in each mode.
5.2.2
Custom Service Features
Time Service (1 - 5 - 2)
Set each day for the correct Day/Night/Lunch/Break Mode.
Intercom Paging (1 - 5 - 7 - 7)
This feature is only available with APT/DPT Integration.
When needed, change the paging code for each of the paging groups.
Example for KX-TA series: All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in
system program [600]. Extension Hunting feature is disabled in [100]. Assign each
86
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
salesperson's mailbox to a different COS in the TVP50 and assign the paging group to that
COS. (This tells the VPS which paging group to dial). In the Intercom paging section,
assign the number "333" (KX-TA series) or "633" (KX-TD series) to the paging group
assigned to the sales dept.
Fax Management (1 - 5 - 7 - 8)
Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX. If the CNG tone is heard,
the KX-TVP50 will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine. If the first fax
machine is busy or doesn't answer (is out of paper), the call is forwarded to the second fax
machine. This also allows an extension to be assigned as the fax manager to be notified on
incoming faxes.
Disconnect Parameter (1 - 5 - 7 - 9)
Determines how many seconds of silence the KX-TVP50 allows during a caller's message
before disconnecting the call.
RS-232C Settings (1 - 6 - 1)
Allows the system administrator to change the baud rate, data bits, etc.
Port Setting (1 - 6 - 2)
Only to be used if the KX-TVP50 is connected to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Use
the CPC control of the telephone switch for normal disconnect problems.
Dialing Parameters (1 - 6 - 3 - 1)
These parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted.
Most of the settings will be left alone. The one setting that is changed quite often is the Transfer
Sequence for the operator or the extension. By default it is set at FX on APT/DPT Integration
and FTX for Inband Integration. In other words, the voice processor dials the flash (recall),
waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number. By default the KX-TVP50 will stay on
the line to monitor the status of the call. If the extension user answers the voice processor will
announce "you have a call" prior to releasing the call. This can be alleviated by adding the
letter "A" or "D" to the sequence. "A" stands for answer; the call will be transferred without
the "you have a call" For a blind or unscreened transfer, add the letter "D" for disconnect.
Installation Manual
87
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.2.3
Custom Service Programming
After the tree is complete, enter the System Programming Custom Service Settings Menu.
Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Settings)
Enter The Number: = 2 (Custom Service)
The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit. Enter the desired number
(1-100).
The Custom Service screen is displayed:
Program - Service Setting - Custom Service Setting - Custom 1 (Not recorded)
1. Description [ ]
:=
2. Prompt Mode [ System ]
1:System 2:User1 3:User2 :=
3. Menu Repeat Cycle [ 3 ] (1-3 times) :=
4. Call Transfer Anytime [ Extn. ] (Extn./Mbx/No) :=
5. Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s) :=
6. No DTMF Input Operation [ c ] (a - f)
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
Select Operation :=
7. Keypad Assignment
Keypad 0 [ c ]
a. Transfer to Mailbox
h. Call Transfer Service
b. Transfer to Extension
i. Subscriber Service
c. Operator
j. Department Dialing
d. Exit
k. Dial by Name
e. Previous Menu
l. Repeat Menu
f. Custom Service
m. Main Menu
g. Voice Mail Service
n. Fax Transfer
88
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Enter data into the Custom Service menu; use the table below as a guide.
Table 19
Description
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies the language that the caller will hear when
calling this Custom Service.
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 Times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the Custom Service
menu is repeated before the No DTMF Input entry is
used.
Call Transfer
Any Time
Extn./Mbx/No
(Extn.)
Specifies where a caller is transferred when dialling an
extension or mailbox number during the menu. If this
entry is set to "Extn.", the caller is transferred to the
corresponding extension. If it is set to "Mbx", the caller
is sent directly to the corresponding mailbox. If it is set
to "No", extension transfer and mailbox transfer are
disabled; only 1-digit entries work (following the
Custom Service menu).
Wait for
Second Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu
choice within the Custom Service. If a second digit is
not dialled within this time, the menu choice is used.
a-f
(c)
This is used when a caller does not dial anything when
hearing the menu (usually rotary callers).
a-n
( =d, 0=c,
others=None)
This entry specifies the action that is performed when a
keypad digit is dialled. Callers can access these services
by pressing the keys on their telephones.
No DTMF
Input
Operation
Keypad
Assignment
Installation Manual
89
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Keypad Assignment Options
Table 20
Entry
90
Function
a. Transfer to Mailbox
Allows the caller to leave messages in a
specific mailbox.
b. Transfer to Extension
Transfers the caller to a specific extension.
c. Operator
Transfers the caller to the operator.
d. Exit
Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller.
e. Previous Menu
Returns the caller to the previous menu.
f. Custom Service
Transfers the caller to another Custom
Service and plays the menu.
g. Voice Mail Service
Allows the caller to access Voice Mail
Service.
h. Call Transfer Service
Allows the caller to access Automated
Attendant Service.
i. Subscriber Service
Allows the caller to access Subscriber
Service. Digits received after entering this
code are assumed to be the subscriber's
mailbox number. If this option is enabled, it
is strongly recommended that each
subscriber establish a password; this will
prevent unauthorised callers from
accidentally or intentionally accessing
subscribers' mailboxes.
j. Department Dialling
Transfer the caller to the Department
Dialling menu.
k. Dial by Name
Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4
letters of the last name of the person they
wish to reach, then transfers him to the
corresponding extension.
l. Repeat Menu
Repeats the Custom Service menu prompt.
m. Main Menu
Returns the caller to the Custom Service top
menu.
n. Fax Transfer
Allows the caller to send fax messages to the
extension specified as the fax extension.
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.2.4
Recording Menus
Once you have finished entering the parameters in each menu, the menu messages should be
recorded. Menu messages tell the caller what options are available and what keys correspond
to those options. For this reason, the prompts must match the programming that has been input.
1. Access the Message Manager's mailbox (998) by dialling an extension connected to the
VPS.
2.
3.
4.
5.
When the VPS answers, Press [#6 998] to enter the Message Manager's mailbox.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
You will hear:
Enter the Custom Service prompt number [1] through [100].
To record Custom Service Exit prompt, press [0].
6. Enter Custom Service number you want to record.
7. You will hear:
Custom Service number (entered number).
Record menu at the tone...
Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded, using the tree
that you created as a guide.
5.2.5
Checking Operation
After you have entered and recorded all menus, it is important to try the program yourself to
see that all functions perform properly. Dial into the system and try all the choices to see if you
are routed correctly. Verify that each menu choice works as it should.
5.2.6
Voice Mail
Voice Mail service is a message-taking service that allows non-subscribers to leave messages
for subscribers. This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live
person. This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired.
Callers can access Voice Mail service by:
• Voice Mail Port - This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports of
the VPS. Callers reaching these ports immediately access Voice Mail service.
• Service Access Command - A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialling [#6]
during a call.
• Custom Service - This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom
Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Voice Mail service.
Installation Manual
91
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.2.7
Mailbox Groups
This program allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at the same time. The
message activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones. These
mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. A voice label
can be recorded for each System Group Distribution List; this is done by the Message Manager
(see D6 RECORDING MESSAGES.) There are 20 groups available, and each group list can
have up to 20 entries each.
To establish a mailbox group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-1-1] (Program - System
Parameter - System Group Assignment - Mailbox Group - Enter).
2. Assign a list number to the Mailbox Group. This number can be from 2-5 digits (same as
mailbox numbers.) It has to be an unused number. In other words, the number assigned to
this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution List number or
mailbox number. For example, we'll use the number 250.
There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List:
Option A:
For inside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed so
that any subscriber can Press [2] to deliver a message, then enter the list number, which
is [250] in this example. The message is delivered to all specified mailboxes.
Option B:
For outside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed as
a custom greeting for incoming callers. For instance, the greeting might be: "To leave a
message for the parts section, press 3." The digit "3" would be assigned to System
Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting.
Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the
individual extension.
5.2.8
Extension Groups
An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox. These extensions may be
assembled into a list called an Extension Group. The extensions in the group cannot have a
personal mailbox! When a message is left in this mailbox, it lights all of the message waiting
lamps of the phones that are in this group. There are 20 groups available, and each group can
have up to 20 entries each.
When a message is left for the extension group, it will light the message waiting lamps on each
phone. The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other
phones. Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a specific
person (for example, a parts centre, or a technical support group).
92
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
To establish an extension group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-2-1].
(Program - System Parameter - System Group Assignment - Extension Group - Enter).
2. Enter an Extension Group Number that has not been assigned to another mailbox or
Extension Group (this must be a vacant number).
3. Enter the extension numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group.
4. Return to the Main Program Menu.
5. Type [1-1-1].(Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit).
Assign the Extension Group number to a mailbox. If you used the number "700" for an
Extension Group number, assign the number "700" as a new mailbox. You must also enter
700 as an extension.
Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation.
5.2.9
Interview Service
The subscriber can leave a series of pre-recorded questions (up to 10) for the caller in an
Interview Mailbox. As the caller answers questions, answers are recorded in the mailbox. After
a caller records the answers, the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp. When
retrieving the messages, the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions.
There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox:
• Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox
• Assign a port as an interview mailbox
To structure an interview mailbox:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-1-1 Mailbox number-1].
(Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Mailbox number - Mailbox setting).
2. Enter the mailbox number that is to be assigned an interview mailbox.
This should be the mailbox number for the person who requires the service.
3. At "6. Interview Mailbox Number "parameter, enter a nonexistent mailbox number. This
will be the interview mailbox for this subscriber — please make a written note of it for
future reference. It will not show up in Mailbox Listing. If, at a later time, you want to delete
the interview mailbox, press backspace at "6. Interview Mailbox Number".
4. Exit System Administration Programming.
5. Record the questions by entering the subscriber's mailbox. Call the VPS and Press [#6 ]
+ the mailbox number assigned to the interview mailbox. From the Main Menu Press [6-1].
Note
When using the Custom Service setting, 1 digit can be assigned to go to the mailbox
of the Interview Service. The mailbox owner's message waiting lamp will go on for
normal Voice Mail messages and for messages left via the interview mailbox.
Installation Manual
93
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.2.10
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an
extension number. The caller is then transferred to the appropriate extension.
Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by:
• Automated Attendant Port - This service can be programmed independently for any or
all ports of the VPS. Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant service.
• Service Access Command - A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by
dialling [#8] during a call.
• Custom Service - The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a
Custom Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Automated Attendant Service.
Note
When the VPS calls an extension, the VPS waits for a reply. This waiting time is established
by "Call Transfer No Answer Time" in Table 60 (B6.7 Other Parameters).
5.2.11
Department Dialling Service
Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 (one-touch dialling). As a guide
for the caller, the Message Manager should record the Department Dialling Menu — for
example, "Thank you for calling. For overseas travel, press 1. For domestic travel, press 2.
For group travel, press 3."
5.2.12
Operator Service
This service (when enabled) can be accessed via:
• Voice Mail - Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General
Delivery Mailbox or Operator Service.
• Automated Attendant - Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service.
• Custom Service - The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a
Custom Service; after pressing this key, the caller enters Operator Service. Operator
Service can also be the destination of "no-DTMF-input".
Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator. Operator Service can
be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call, it goes to Operator 2. If that
fails, the call goes to Operator 3. If that fails, the caller can record a message. At each stage,
there are other options for busy cases and no-answer cases. Operator Service can be
programmed differently for Day/Night/Lunch/Break Mode. Each operator can be assigned a
mailbox for message-taking.
94
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.3
SETTING PORTS
5.3.1
Port Service Menu
Access the Port Service Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 3 (Port/Trunk Service)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Port Service)
Screen output:
Program - Port/Trunk Service - Port Service
Enter the Port Number (1 - 2) :=
from Program - Port/Trunk Service - Port Service Menu:
Enter the data using the table below as a guide.
Note
In the table below, the sub-parameter "Prompt for Rotary Callers" is underlined. This subparameter can be assigned only when "Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to "Selective".
Table 21
Description
Company
Greeting No.
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
95
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Table 21
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Incoming Call 1. Voice Mail
Service
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
[Notes]
• When you specify the Interview Service, one of the
Subscriber's Interview mailbox numbers should also
be specified.
• When you specify the Custom Service, one of 100 (1100) Custom Service numbers should also be
specified.
Incoming Call 1. System
Service
2. User 1
Prompt
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port.
[Notes]
• This parameter is not valid if incoming call service is
set to "Interview" or "Custom".
• If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
1. System
Prompt for
Rotary Callers 2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies in which language rotary callers hear the voice
prompts when they cannot enter any digit to select a
"Prompt Selection Number" while Multilingual Selection
Menu message is being played.
Delayed
Answer Time
Specifies whether the port answers immediately (0) or
after a delay (1 - 15 s).
0-15 s
(0)
Note
Callers are generally accustomed to their calls being answered within 10 s and most callers
abandon the call in under 45 s if no reply is obtained. This unit will answer incoming calls
in under 10 s if required. (Delayed Answer Time)
96
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.4
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Automated Attendant parameters include: Department Dialling, operator parameters, and
alternate extension.
If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension (such as modem extension),
alternate extension should be assigned (See "Alternate Extension Assignment" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant Parameters).
5.4.1
Automated Attendant Menu
From Top Menu:
Enter The Numbers : = 1 - 4 - 1
Program - Service Settings - Auto. Attn. Setting Menu
1. Department Dialing
2. Operator's Parameters
3. Alternate Extension
5.4.2
Department Dialling
Department Dialling numbers (1 - 9) represent department extensions; these numbers are given
to the caller in the initial list of prompts.
Return to Program - Service Settings - Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Program - Service Settings - Auto. Attn. Setting - Department Dialing Menu
1. Department Dialing No.1 [ ] := 202
2. Department Dialing No.2 [ ] := 204
3. Department Dialing No.3 [ ] := 215
4. Department Dialing No.4 [ ] := 236
5. Department Dialing No.5 [ ] := 207
6. Department Dialing No.6 [ ] := 208
7. Department Dialing No.7 [ ] := 209
8. Department Dialing No.8 [ ] := 210
9. Department Dialing No.9 [ ] := 211
5.4.3
Operator's Parameters
If you enable operator service, you must set the following parameters: operator extension and
mailbox number, coverage modes, and message repeat cycle.
Operator 1:
Cannot have a personal mailbox. The default is set at "0" which coincides with the
operator of the PBX. When a caller tries to leave a message for the Operator 1, the
message will automatically go to the General Delivery Mailbox (GDM).
Installation Manual
97
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
To light Message Waiting Lamp at Operator 1's extension: Assign Mailbox 998 to
Operator 1's extension. This will notify Operator 1 of messages left in the GDM.
Operators 2 and 3:
For KX-TD816, KX-TD1232 and KX-TD612, Operators 2 and 3 can be assigned to a
floating number that is assigned to a ring group.
Return to Program - Service Settings - Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Service Settings - Auto. Attn. Setting - Operator's Parameters Menu
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
3. Lunch Mode
4. Break Mode
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
Enter the data using the table below as a guide. The table below is for Operator 1 as an
example. Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3.
Table 22
Description
Operator
Service
Value Range
(Default)
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Operator's
Extension
1-5 Digits
(0)
98
Description/Function
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
[Note]
• All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the
General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator
Service is disabled.
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
[Notes]
• The default setting (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature
and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature.
When using these features, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
• The extension number must not be assigned
anywhere else (in particular, the extension must
not have a mailbox). Otherwise, you will get an
error message.
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Table 22
Description
Operator's
Mailbox No.
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 Digits
(998)
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a
message in this mailbox depending upon how the
Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are
set.
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered
within the time set, the VPS will offer other options
as defined by the "No Answer Coverage Mode".*1
[Notes]
• This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
• If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator
No Answer Time" to 15 s.
Operator No
Answer Time
Busy
Coverage
Mode
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold
1. Hold
and the Operator 1 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage 2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option
3. Call Waiting
specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to
the caller.
4. Disconnect Message
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 1 when
(Hold)
another call is waiting using the Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
Message
Repeat Cycle
Installation Manual
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
1-3 Times
(3)
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the
"Operator No Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select*2—Allows the caller to leave a
message or call another extension.
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to
Operator 2.
Specifies the number of times that the VPS will
play the Automated Attendant top menu.
99
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
*1 If more than 1 operator is assigned, we recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator
No Answer Time" to 15 s.
*2 In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s mailbox
when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
1. No input to Automated Attendant.
2. No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Input Operation" is set to "C.
Operator" in Table 51 in B5.2
Custom Service.
3. No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage" is set to
"Operator Extension" in Table 68 in B6.7
100
Other Parameters.
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.5
SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5.1
Mailbox Setting Menu
Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration
Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Program Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Mailbox Setting)
Program - Mailbox Setting
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
5.5.2
Entering a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 23
Description
Value Range
(Default)
The Extension
of the Owner
2-5 Digits
(None)
Owner's First
Name
Owner's Last
Name
Installation Manual
Description/Function
Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the
mailbox. Any valid number can be assigned.
The Dial by Name feature uses the last name. Both are
Up to 16 alphabet printed on mailbox report.
characters
(None)
101
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Table 23
Description
Class of
Service No.
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
COS No. 1-62
(1)
Used to define a set of services available to the
subscriber. 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message and
System Managers. Most subscribers can be placed in the
same COS. Anyone who needs unclaimed messages
forwarded to a cell phone, beeper (pager) or another
mailbox would need to be in a separate COS.
Covering
Extension
2-5 Digits
(None)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when a
Covering Extension is specified under Incomplete Call
Handling and is the option chosen by the caller.
Interview
Mailbox
Number
2-5 Digits
(None)
Used to permit a mailbox owner to have an interview
mailbox. Must be an unused mailbox number.
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, calls coming to the extension through
Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox and do
not ring the extension. (Message Waiting Lamp will not
be turned on).
From Mailbox Setting:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 2
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
3. 3rd Device
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
102
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 24
Description
Dial Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 32 Digits of Assigns the telephone or beeper (pager) number to
[1-9,0, ,#,P,T,M,X] Device 1, 2 and/or 3.
(None)
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse,
or Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
The callback number entry code (X) must be entered
if COS is set to enable and set to beeper (pager).
Use backspace to delete your entry.
Type of
Device
1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Assigns whether device is beeper (pager) or
telephone.
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
telephone.
Use Mode
1. Not Use
2. Continuously
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a
schedule basis when a message has been left in the
mailbox.
No. of Retries
0-9 Times
(0)
Specifies the number of times a device should be
retried when busy or no-answer.
Busy Delay
Time
2-120 min
(3)
The time the VPS will wait before retry on busy.
No Answer
Delay Time
2-120 min
(30)
The time the VPS will wait before retry on No
Answer.
Installation Manual
103
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
Table 24
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Time Frame 1,
2
MON - SUN
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM: am/pm
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
Weekly Schedule for Message Waiting Notification.
The schedule is only used when Use Device is set to
Scheduled.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Remote Call FWD to CO
1. Telephone No.1 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.1 : =
2. Telephone No.2 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.2 : =
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 25
Parameter
Telephone
Number 1, 2
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16 digits
(None)
Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an
outside (CO) line.
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
" ".
Note: This feature is available with DPT Integration
only.
104
Installation Manual
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.5.3
Deleting a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Delete
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Are you sure? (Y/ N) : =
5.5.4
Password Reset
To reset a subscriber's password, go to the Password Reset Menu. "Enter the Mailbox Number"
appears on the screen. Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset. "Enter the Mailbox
Number" appears again. Enter a new number if you wish to reset more than one password.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Password Reset
Enter the Mailbox Number : = 201
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
5.5.5
Mailbox Listing
This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 4
Program - Mailbox Setting - Mailbox Listing
1: 201
6: ---11: ---16: ---21: ---26: ----
2: 203
7: ---12: ---17: ---22: ---27: ----
3: ---8: ---13: ---18: ---23: ---28: ----
4: ---9: ---14: ---19: ---24: ---29: ----
5: ---10: ---15: ---20: ---25: ---30: ----
System Manager’s Mailbox No. :999
Message Manager’s Mailbox No. :998
Installation Manual
105
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM
5.6
TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers.
He should explain which service (Voice Mail service, Automated Attendant service, Interview
Service, or a Custom service) will play during the day, and what services will play during
night/lunch/breaks. He should explain that outside callers are called "non-subscribers" because
they do not have a mailbox. VPS guidance prompts will assist non-subscribers in reaching the
extension or mailbox they need. He should explain the responsibilities of the System
Administrator, the Message Manager, and the System Manager — and how each can be
contacted (phone number, mailbox number, or email address, or all three).
The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers.
Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages. To
check messages (or change mailbox parameters) from an outside phone, do the following:
As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message, Press code [# 6 ] and then the mailbox
number. For example, a subscriber who has extension 215 and mailbox 215 would press
code [# 6 215]. If the subscriber has a password enabled, the password must be entered.
Note
Each subscriber can set a password of up to 10 digits to his own mailbox. It is strongly
recommended that each subscriber set a password, which will prevent unauthorised
callers from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscriber's mailboxes.
If the subscriber forgets his password, he should contact either the System Administrator or the
System Manager. Either one can clear the password so that the subscriber can establish a new
password.
Explain the purpose of the General Delivery Mailbox. The Message Manager will periodically
check it, and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber.
Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists. They can be created by the System
Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers. In particular,
senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group Distribution Lists.
Twenty lists can be created, with twenty mailboxes in each list.
Finally, if Custom Service menus are used, subscribers should be encouraged to listen to these
menus often and make suggestions for improvement. Custom service is a very powerful feature
of the Panasonic VPS. Make the most of this feature.
106
Installation Manual
FINAL SETUP
Section 6
FINAL SETUP
Installation Manual
107
FINAL SETUP
6.1
MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX (Mailbox
998)
The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system
messages. Please see Appendix D (D6 RECORDING MESSAGES) to see the full array of
recording tasks. Follow the instructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user
prompts.
6.1.1
Accessing the Message Manager's Mailbox
1. Enter an extension number that is connected to the Voice Mail.
You will hear the initial prompt:
Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening.
Welcome to the Voice Processing System...
2. Press [# 6 9 9 8] to access the message manager's mailbox.
You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set:
Enter your password, followed by the pound (hash) sign.
3. Enter the message manager's password (if programmed). Otherwise, you will not hear the
Main Menu of Message Manager's Service.
6.1.2
Main Menu of Message Manager's Service
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customise your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To end this call, press [ ].
108
Installation Manual
FINAL SETUP
6.1.3
Company Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Message Manager's Main Command Menu.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [1] to change the Company Greeting.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
After you record the company greeting, it may be necessary to enter programming through
the terminal and set the company greeting assignment under the Port Settings Menu, Trunk
Service Menu and Holiday Service Menu. This tells the system what company greeting to
play on each port and trunk (outside line) group. A company greeting should be very short.
Example: "Thank you for calling the ABC Company". It is not necessary to give any other
instruction within the company greeting because instructions will follow the company
greeting automatically. If Interview Service follows, explanations should be included in the
first question (work for the subscriber who maintains the Interview Service mailbox). If
Custom Service follows, explanations should be included in the first menu (work for the
Message Manager).
6.1.4
Recording the Company Name (Enter #6 998,5,2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.1.5
Access the Message Manager's Main Command Menu.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [2] to record the Company Name.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Note
The company name is only played when the External Message Delivery feature is
used.
Custom Service Greetings (Enter [#6 998,5,4])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Main Menu of Message Manager's Service.
To modify messages, Press [5].
To change the Custom Service Menu, Press [4].
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Example: Custom Service Greeting: "Thank you for calling the ABC Company. If you know
your party's last name, you may dial it at any time during this message."
Installation Manual
109
FINAL SETUP
Note
This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port. The recording will
be played directly after the call is received.
6.1.6
Customising User Prompts (Enter [#6 998,5,6])
The customer may want to enter user prompts in place of the factory-provided system prompts.
To change the user prompts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Access the Main Menu of Message Manager's Service.
To modify messages, Press [5].
To modify the user prompts, Press [6].
To change user prompt 1, Press [1]; to change user prompt 2, Press [2].
To change specified prompts, Press [1]; to change all prompts, Press [2].
Enter the prompt number you want to change.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus.
Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process.
Note
Prompt 585: The system prompt is "This is the General Delivery Mailbox." You can
record User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as, "Thank you for calling the ABC company.
We are currently closed, however, if you leave your name and phone number, we will
return your call as quickly as possible."
110
Installation Manual
FINAL SETUP
6.2
SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The following steps complete the basic installation of the KX-TVP50 system. For each
mailbox on the system, a no-answer, busy, and after hours greeting should be recorded, as well
as the owner's name and password. Please follow the steps below to set up the mailboxes
accordingly.
6.2.1
Recording Personal Greetings
• The No Answer Greeting is played whenever the caller enters your mailbox during business
hours.
• The Busy Greeting is played when the caller is told your line is busy and then elects to leave
a message in your mailbox.
• The After Hours Greeting is played whenever the caller enters your mailbox when the VPS
is in Night Mode.
1. Dial the extension number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ], then the mailbox number you wish to change.
3. Enter your password (if programmed), then the [#] key.
You are now inside the mailbox.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For mailbox management, Press [5].
To change the personal greetings, Press [1].
To change the No Answer Greeting, Press [1] again.
The system will then say: "No Answer Greeting is not recorded. Record greeting at the
tone."
8. State your greeting at the tone.
Example: "Hi this is Tom. I am away from my desk right now but please leave a message at
the tone and I will return your call as soon as possible."
9. When you finish speaking, Press [1].
10. The system gives the options of reviewing, accepting, or erasing the message.
11. To review the message, Press [1].
12. If the greeting is acceptable, Press [2].
13. The system will then play the menu for changing the No Answer Greeting, Busy signal
Greeting and the After hours greeting. Record the busy signal greeting as you did the No
Answer Greeting.
14. Continue on to the After Hours greeting and hang up when finished.
6.2.2
Recording the Owner's Name
1. Dial the extension number of the VPS.
Installation Manual
111
FINAL SETUP
2. When the VPS answers Press [#6 ], then the mailbox number you wish to change.
3. Enter your password (if programmed), then Press [#].
You are now inside the mailbox.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
For mailbox management, Press [5].
To change the owner's name, Press [3].
The system will say: "Owner's name is not recorded. Record owner's name at the tone."
State the owner's first and last name at the tone.
Press [1] when finished.
• The VPS tells you the customer's name.
9. Press [2] to accept.
TEST THE SYSTEM
Before backing up the system, call each extension to see that each port functions as it
should. Check for proper greetings and call transfers.
112
Installation Manual
FINAL SETUP
6.3
BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
Note
Before saving a file, we recommend that the Answer Mode of the VPS be turned off by
Typing [OFLN] and then pressing ENTER. This prevents data from changing while it is
being saved. (The system will not answer calls when off-line.)
1. Choose the Utility Command. Type [SAVE], then Press ENTER. See screen output
below.
from System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number : = 3
Utility Command
$ SAVE
VPS Flash Memory Data Save ( VPS -> PC : Xmodem )
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4: User Prompts-1
5: User Prompts-2
6: Custom Service Menus
7: Personal Greetings
8: Company Greetings
Select No. : = 2
2. To start Press [2] and then ENTER.
3. Press RETURN or ENTER.
Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example.
4. Select Receive File from the Transfer Menu.
5. Specify a folder where data is to be saved (if necessary, use "Browse").
6. Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data.
7. Click "Receive".
8. Enter desired filename and click "OK".
The file transfer screen appears and shows download progress. Download time will vary
depending on the communication speed and file sizes.
Installation Manual
113
FINAL SETUP
"SAVE Completed" will appear on the screen when the file has been saved. Continue
saving the other items as needed. It is not necessary to save the "Program" because it is
resident on the flash memory (Master) and cannot be altered. We do recommend all other
data be saved including User Prompt 1, and User Prompt 2 (if it has been recorded).
Notes
Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal) cannot be
saved by the above procedure, only Caller ID numbers can be saved. When the saved
Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command, the following things should be
done:
• For System Caller Name Announcement, the Message Manager re-records caller
names (see "Recording System Caller Names" in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES).
• For Personal Caller Name Announcement, subscribers re-record caller names
(see 4.12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber’s Guide).
User Prompt files are very large and can take several hours to save. Store saved files
in a safe area.
114
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Section 7
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual
115
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1
INITIALISING THE SYSTEM
Initialising the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system
parameters to the default setting. Throughout this section, menu selections are indicated as
"System Administration Top Menu - (Selection Number)." This means that the System
Administration Top Menu must first be accessed. On the first menu displayed, make the menu
selection corresponding to the first menu displayed. Repeat this process for each subsequent
menu when additional selection numbers are listed.
To initialise the system, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 4
1. Go to the System Administration Top Menu
1 : Program
2 : System Reports
3 : Utility Command
4 : System Reset/Clear
5 :Quick Setup (VT100 Mode Only)
Enter the number: =
2. Type [4] for System Initialisation.
System Reset/Clear Menu
1. Mailbox No. Length [3]
2. System Manager's Mailbox No. [999]
3. Message Manager's Mailbox No. [998]
Will you change the settings ? (Y/N): =
3. Type [Y] (this places the VPS in the off-line mode).
System Reset/Clear Menu
1. Mailbox No. Length [3] (2 - 5) : =
2. System Manager's Mailbox No. [999] : =
3. Message Manager's Mailbox No. [998] : =
Are these parameters acceptable ? (Y/N) : =
4. Type [Y] to start the system resetting.
System Initializing
•
•
•
116
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
5. When system initialising is complete, the following display will appear:
** ON LINE MODE **
>
Note
The execution time for System Reset/Clear may differ each time it is performed
because of system capacity and system programs.
Generally, initialisation will take about 2 min to accomplish.
Installation Manual
117
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2
UTILITY COMMANDS
In the Utility Command Mode, the System Administrator can access the functions described
below by entering the appropriate command at the "$" prompt, and Pressing RETURN.
To select the Utility Commands Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 3
Utility Command (Type ‘HELP’ for command list.)
$
Table 26
OFLN:
ONLN:
PASS:
TIME:
PSET:
ELOG:
SAVE:
LOAD:
GPRN:
VERS:
CREP:
CCLR:
MWL:
MRL:
MPLT:
HELP:
QSET:
LMON:
PUTD:
WCID:
118
Sets the system to off-line mode
Sets the system to on-line mode
Sets the System Administrator's password
Sets the system clock, date, and time
Specifies the time reports will be printed
Displays device error log
Stores a backup of the program or data in the flash memory
Restores a backup of the program or data to the system
Displays all of the VPS parameters
Displays the version of the program
Displays the keypad assignments, message recording status and the
tree-structure of a Custom service
Clears a Custom service menu access count
Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the message
waiting lamp on the extensions
Sets the minimum recording length of a message
Displays the user prompt recording status
Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands
Perform a basic setup of your VPS so that you can use it quickly
Line Monitor
Display Touchtone Information
Wait for Caller ID
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2.1
Off-line Set (OFLN)
The OFLN utility command is used to turn off the VPS Answer Mode. Set the VPS to Off-Line
Mode before deleting a mailbox, since this operation involves the updating of a large number
of related parameters.
Type OFLN, then Press RETURN. If no VPS ports are in use, the VPS will immediately
suspend answering calls.
$ OFLN
** OFF LINE MODE **
If any VPS port is in use, the VPS will display the following warning:
*** Now line is used!! *** <WAIT>
The VPS will be in the Off-Line Mode when the following message is displayed.
** OFF LINE MODE **
7.2.2
On-line Set (ONLN)
The ONLN command is used to place the VPS into the Answer Mode.
Type ONLN, then Press RETURN.
$ ONLN
** ON LINE MODE **
7.2.3
Set Password (PASS)
Use the PASS command to create, change and clear system passwords. Valid passwords are
created using up to 10 characters; any alphanumeric character, [(space)], [.] and [_] can be
used.
IMPORTANT
• We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum
protection against hackers and dial through fraud.
• Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
• Please change the password periodically.
1. Type PASS, then Press RETURN.
$ PASS
1: Administrator Password 2: System Reset/Clear Password :=
Installation Manual
119
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
2. To create a password or change an existing password, go to Step 3.
To clear a password, go to Step 4.
3. To create a password or change an existing password:
a) Type [1] or [2]
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
Note
When you press [2] to change the System Reset/Clear password you should
type the current (OLD) password before entering a new one.
b) Type the password.
Verification: =
c) Type the password again for verification.
4. To clear a password:
a) Type [1] or [2].
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
b) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
VERIFICATION : =
c) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
Note
The password entered on the screen will not appear. The VPS does not
distinguish capitals from lower cases.
7.2.4
Set Time (TIME)
The TIME command is used to set the system date and time. A number of system functions
require that the system time and date be set correctly. These functions include message waiting
notification, external message delivery, call-retries-after initial-failure-to-connect, and
automatic deletion of messages.
Time Synchronisation: If you have DPT Integration between the VPS and your PBX (latest
software version), the date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS whenever
the PBX sets the date and time. Also, this transfer occurs whenever DPT Integration is
established.
120
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Type TIME, then Press RETURN.
$ TIME
Current time is 12:34, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
2. Type the current time.
Current date is TUE 3-AUG-2002
Enter new date (DD-MM-YY) : =
3. Type the current date. For the year, type the last 2 digits.
Note
Enter the exact time and date. This command cannot be used when either the System
or the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature.
7.2.5
Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET)
This command is used to issue system usage reports (Flash Memory Usage Report/Port Usage
Report/Call Account Report) at a specified time each day by entering the PSET command. A
printer or data terminal must be connected to the VPS at the RS-232C port for the reports to be
printed or displayed.
1. Type PSET, then Press RETURN.
$ PSET
Report Print Out Service [ Disable ]
1 : Enable 2: Disable :=
2. Type [1] to enable this function or Type [2] to disable it.
Enter The Print Out Time (HH:MM, AM/PM) :=
3. Type the time to print the reports.
Note
The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where the ">" prompt
is displayed.
7.2.6
Error Log Display (ELOG)
This command is used when diagnosing VPS problems. When selected, this command will
display an error log.
Installation Manual
121
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
COM. Communication error between CPU and DSP
DATA Process error of voice data
MEM. Memory error
PRG. Program error in CPU card
R/W Read/Write error of Flash Memory
Type ELOG, then Press RETURN.
$ ELOG
DEVICE
ERROR
TIME
1. CPU
2. CLOCK
3. FLASH
MEMORY
4. DSP*
5. DSP*
6. CPU
MEM-GET
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
14-JUL 14:00 PM
14-JUL 14:00 PM
14-JUL 14:00 PM
SCAN
FIFO
APPLICATION (x)
14-JUL 14:00 PM
14-JUL 14:00 PM
14-JUL 14:00 PM
* = Port number (1-2)
Note
The errors that can be identified by the system are displayed and explained in the following
tables.
122
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Device Error Log Indications
Table 27
Indication
CPU
MEM-GET
CLOCK
Meaning
CPU card software memory acquisition error.
CPU card is short of memory temporarily because
of too much traffic.
Clock access error. Clock IC is out of order.
Check the hardware.
FLASH
MEMORY
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy) Flash Memory access error. If there is a sector that
often causes errors, check the flash memory.
xx :
IDE error code
yyyy : read/write error sector number
DSP*
SCAN
DSP-SCAN error. DSP is out of order. Check the
hardware.
DSP*
FIFO
DSP/FIFO error. During the system is handling
calls, there was a temporary problem with the DSP
and FIFO memory.
CPU
APPLICATION (x)
Application error. While the system is handling
calls, a temporary application error occurred.
x: port number
* = Port number (1-2)
Error Indications at System Startup
Example of a terminal display when errors are generated
Table 28
Indication
Meaning
ROM ERROR: Sum Error!!
ROM checksum error.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: initialise
Error!!
Flash Memory initialisation error.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: No
System!!
No system Flash Memory present.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Program
Load Error!!
Program could not be loaded from system Flash
Memory.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Program
Sum Error!!
Checksum error in program loaded from system
Flash Memory.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: System
Data Error!!
Error Loading of administrator data from system
Flash Memory.
SYSTEM ERROR: 1
Administrator data error.
Installation Manual
123
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 28
SYSTEM ERROR: 2
Error loading of report data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 3
Clock error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 4
Mailbox data error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 5
Message data error (1).
SYSTEM ERROR: 6
Message data error (2).
SYSTEM ERROR: 7
Error loading of control data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 8
Error loading of voice prompt data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 9
Error loading of MWL control data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 10
Error loading of flash memory identify data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 11
Error writing of VBI chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 12
Error writing of BLK chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 13
Error loading of user prompt modify data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 14
Error loading of Class of Service data.
No CO lines are active!!
DSP Error.
COs are all disabled!!
All Ports are malfunctioning.
Ports are malfunctioning for APT(DPT)
APT(DPT) Interface Connection is not Integration because telephone lines are
Established.
disconnected or Integration with PBX is not set to
APT(DPT) Integration mode.
Error and Warning Indications During System Operation
Table 29
Indication
7.2.7
Meaning
FLASH MEMORY STORAGE SPACE IS
NOW EXCEEDING
80%...
80% or more of the Flash Memory voice
storage area is used.
ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error
Error loading of ASCII terminal control
program.
Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE)
All system programming data and voice prompts (7 functional areas) can be saved in separate
data files. To save this data, a data terminal must be connected to the RS-232C port of the VPS.
Files must be saved individually. The SAVE command must be executed for each data file. It
124
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
will require several minutes to SAVE for all the data selected. When performing this operation,
always wait until the process completion indication appears.
WARNING
Never save (back-up) and upload the "Program" without your dealer's support.
The memory required to save each data component is indicated below.
1. Program - approximately 1 Mbytes (See Warning above)
2. Parameters - approximately 0.4 Mbytes (System Configuration)
3. System Prompts - approximately 5 Mbytes (Do not save - prompts are saved
as defaults in the flash memory)
Saving items 4-7 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages.
4. User Prompts-1 (Modified prompts - Modifications to default settings)
5. User Prompts-2 (Modified prompts - Modifications to default settings)
6. Custom Service Menu (Customer service recordings)
7. Personal Greetings (Subscriber greetings)
8. Company Greetings
Note
Before saving a file, we recommend that the Answer Mode of the VPS be turned off by
Typing [OFLN] and then pressing ENTER. This prevents data from changing while it is
being saved. (The system will not answer calls when off-line.)
1. Type SAVE, then Press RETURN.
$ SAVE
VPS Flash Memory Data Save (VPS -> PC : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Select No. :=
2. Select item to be backed up, then Press RETURN. The size of the file will be displayed.
To start press ‘RETURN’
3. Press RETURN.
Installation Manual
125
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
- - - - - - SAVE Start!!
4. Perform a Standard File Transfer. Set the data terminal to the receiving (Answer) mode
(Xmodem) and specify the backup filename. The specified data will be transmitted to the
data terminal.
Note
The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that
supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be cancelled by Typing [\]
before entering the sending mode. Once the sending mode has been selected, use the cancel
command of the communication software being used.
If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you SAVE at the
maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS (see B7.1 RS232C Parameters). Next, change the RS-232C setting of your data terminal to the same
speed.
7.2.8
Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD)
This command is used to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS. The LOAD
command must be executed for each data file.
When performing this operation, always wait until the process completion indication appears
before proceeding.
1. Type LOAD, then Press RETURN.
$ LOAD
VPS Flash Memory Data Load (PC -> VPS : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Select No.:=
2. Select the item to be restored to the flash memory, then Press RETURN.
To start press ‘RETURN’
3. Press RETURN.
Start - - - - - - Load!!
When "CCC" appears, the VPS is ready for loading.
126
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Set the data terminal to the sending (Call) mode (Xmodem). Then enter the backup
filename. Press ENTER. The backup data will be restored to the flash memory.
5. When the parameter load has been completed, power-off and restart the system.
Note
The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that
supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be cancelled by Typing [\]
before entering the sending mode. Once the sending mode has been selected, use the cancel
command of the communication software being used.
If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you LOAD at the
maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS (see B7.1 RS232C Parameters). Next, change the RS-232C setting of your data terminal to the same
speed.
7.2.9
Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN)
This command is used to print all VPS parameter settings (output to screen).
Type GPRN, then Press RETURN.
$ GPRN
0: All Parameters
1: Mailbox Setting
2: Class of Service Setting
3: Port/Trunk Service Setting
4: Service Setting - Auto Attn. Setting
5: Service Setting - Custom Service Setting
6: Service Setting - Caller ID Call Routing
7: System Parameter Setting - System Group Assignment
8: System Parameter Setting - Time Service, Holiday, Daylight Saving Time
9: System Parameter Setting - Prompt Setting
10: System Parameter Setting - System Caller Name Announcement
11: System Parameter Setting - Others
12: Hardware Setting
13: System Reset Clear Parameter
Please select := 1
Note
This command is only valid when in the ASCII TERMINAL mode.
7.2.10
Program Version Display (VERS)
This command is used to display the version numbers of the flash memory and main ROM.
Installation Manual
127
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Type VERS, then Press RETURN.
$ VERS
V.P.S. PROGRAM VERSION
MAIN FLASH MEMORY : VE31AA (3.00)
MAIN ROM :
: VE010C (1.02)
Note
The numbers are examples only. Your system will show different numbers.
7.2.11
Custom Service Report (CREP)
The CREP command is used to display the Custom Service menu access count, the keypad
assignments, message recording status and the tree-structure of the Custom Service.
Type CREP, Press Space, Enter the Custom Service number (1-100), and Press RETURN.
Custom [100] (System) (Access: 9 ) (Menu Msg. : None)
| < multilingual pick >
[N]- Xfer Mbx (998)
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- Custom [1] (System) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| < english service>
|
[N]- Operator
|
[0 ]- Operator
|
[1 ]- A.A. Service
|
[2 ]- V.M.Service
|
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
|
[ ]- Subscriber
[2 ]- Custom [2] (User -1) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| <Spanish service>
|
[N]- Operator
|
[0 ]- Operator
|
[1 ]- A.A. Service
|
[2 ]- V.M.Service
|
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
|
[ ]- Subscriber
[3 ]- Custom [3] (User -2) (Access: 3) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| < vietnamese service>
|
[N]- Operator
|
[0 ]- Operator
|
[1 ]- A.A. Service
|
[2 ]- V.M.Service
|
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
|
[ ]- Exit
[4 ]- Dept Dial
[5 ]- Repeat Menu
[ ]- Exit
[# ]- Main Menu
128
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Custom [100]:
Indicates that Custom Service No. is "100."
System:
Indicates that "System" prompts are active.
Access: 9:
Indicates that this Custom Service was accessed 9 times
by callers. This counter can be cleared. See
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear
(CCLR).
Menu Msg. :None:
Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service
is "None (not recorded)". If menu message is recorded,
"Rec" will appear.
[N]-Xfer Mbx (998): Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox (GDM)
if he dials nothing.
7.2.12
[1]-Custom [1]:
Custom Service 1 will play when the "1" key is pressed.
[2]-Custom [2]:
Custom Service 2 will play when the "2" key is pressed.
[3]-Custom [3]:
Custom Service 3 will play when the "3" key is pressed.
[4]-Dept Dial:
Department Dialling menu will play when the "4" key is
pressed.
Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR)
Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has
been accessed. This command clears this counter.
Type CCLR, Press Space, and Enter Custom Service Menu (1-100), then Press RETURN.
$ CCLR 20
Custom Menu <20> Access Counter Cleared !!
Note
Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Services.
Installation Manual
129
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2.13
Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL)
This command is used to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the
Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension. This setting is required when a PBX other than
the Panasonic KX-T series telephone system is used.
$ MWL
Current Setting of M.W.L. Retry Count is 1
Enter M.W.L. Retry Count (1-3) =
Note
This setting is not valid if "Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message" is set to "Yes."
7.2.14
Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL)
This command is used to specify the minimum message recording length (0-3 s). Messages
shorter than this setting are discarded from the mailbox.
Note
The minimum recording length can only be set using this command.
1. Type MRL, then Press RETURN.
$ MRL
Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2
Enter Minimum Recording Length (0-3) =
2. Type, the message length.
130
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2.15
Modified Prompt List (MPLT)
This command is used to display the user prompt recording status — recorded, not recorded,
or turned off.
1. Type MPLT, then Press RETURN.
MPLT —> both prompts
MPLT 1 —> User 1 prompts
MPLT 2 —> User 2 prompts
$ MPLT 1
***List of Registered User Prompt 1 No. ([1], [2], . . ., [914])***
,
1,
,
,
,
5*,
6,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
*** Total number of Registered = 3 ***
*** Total number TURNED OFF = 1 ***
Blank:
Prompt no.:
Prompt no. with an*:
The prompt has not been recorded (but the default
(System Prompt) is active).—WILL BE HEARD
The prompt has been recorded.—WILL BE HEARD
The prompt has been recorded but is turned off.—
WILL NOT BE HEARD
Note
The "Total Number of Registered" shown at the bottom of the screen includes the prompts
that have been turned off.
Installation Manual
131
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2.16
Utility Command List (HELP)
The HELP command displays the list of all available utility commands.
1. Type HELP, then Press RETURN.
$ HELP
OFLN
ONLN
PASS
TIME
PSET
ELOG
SAVE
LOAD
GPRN
VERS
CREP [no.]
CCLR [no.]
MWL
MRL
MPLT [opt]
QSET
LMON
PUTD
WCID
$
7.2.17
: System Off-line
: System On-line
: Password setting
: Time & Date setting
: Report Print Out Time setting
: Device Error Log Listing
: VPS Program & Date Save (VPS —> PC : Xmodem)
: VPS Program & Date Load (VPS <— PC : Xmodem)
: Parameter Global Printing (only ‘ASCII Terminal’ mode)
: Program Version Check
: Custom Menu Information List
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100)
: Custom Menu Access Counter Clear
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100/0) (0: Clear All)
: MWL Retry count Set (1-3)
: Minimum Recording Length Set (0-3)
: Registered User Prompt No. List
[opt] : 1
—> User Prompt 1
2
—> User Prompt 2
None —> User Prompt 1&2
: Quick Setup
: Line Monitor
: DTMF Information Display (Don't leave enabled after
troubleshooting.)
: Wait Time for Caller ID
Quick Setup (QSET)
This command is initially used to perform a basic setup of your VPS when you use your VPS
for the first time or after system initialisation.
Note
Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software.
Type QSET, then Press RETURN.
132
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2.18
Circuit Condition Display (LMON)
This command is used to display the circuit condition every 1.5 s. The command can be turned
off by entering [\].
The following circuit conditions may be displayed.
"Ready"
"Incoming Call Service"
"Outgoing Call Service"
"DSP Reset Processing"
"PT connect Processing"
"Error/Not Exist"
$ LMON
CO No.:
1:
2:
7.2.19
: Waiting for a call
: Answering a call
: Making an outbound call
: Processing DSP reset
: Processing PT connect
: DSP Error
Status
Ready
Ready
Touchtone Information Display (PUTD)
This command is used to display the touchtones the VPS receives and sends.
In addition to the touchtones the following are displayed — the Incoming Call Service (Voice
Mail, Automated Attendant, Custom, and Interview) entered by the caller and the time periods
that the ports are enabled.
Type PUTD. The VPS will remain in this mode until "PUTD" is entered again. The default
setting for this mode for all ports is "OFF."
$ PUTD
Target Port : **
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
To change the mode from "PUTD" to "OFF," Type PUTD again.
$ PUTD
Target Port : 00
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting
$
Note: "*" means "enable" for the port
"0" means "disable" for the port
Installation Manual
133
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
To set the mode for only 1 port, Type PUTD and the port number.
$ PUTD 1
Target Port : 0*
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
Sample display:
$ PUTD
Target Port for Debug : * *
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting
$
[1] DTMF:3
[1] DTMF:8
[1] A.Attend
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:6
[1] Voice Mail
[1] DTMF:1
[1] DTMF:0
[1] DTMF:1
[1] NonSub Svc
[1] * * *
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:9
[1] Thank you
WARNING
"PUTD" is a command originally used when troubleshooting. Do not use this command
for any other purpose. Do not disconnect the RS-232C connection while the "PUTD"
command is enabled. This could cause data overflow.
7.2.20
Wait for Caller ID (WCID)
Use the WCID command to specify the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must wait for the
Caller ID after the VPS has received the incoming call from the PBX.
If Caller ID is not needed at all, set the waiting time to "0" to accelerate the VPS response to
incoming calls.
Type WCID, then Press RETURN.
$ WCID
WAIT TIME FOR CALLER ID (5 sec) [0-60 sec] : = 0
$
134
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3
SYSTEM REPORTS
The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating
status. The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed. The terminal or printer must
be connected to the RS-232C port. The following 8 report options are available.
To select the System Reports Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1
System Reports
System Report Menu
1. Mailbox Assignments
2. COS Assignments
3. System Service Report
4. Call Accont Report
5. Port Usage Report
6. Flash Memory Usage Report
7. Mailbox Usage Report
8. Fax Call Report
Enter the Number : =
The following 4 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the following 4 reports, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 2
System Reports
System Clear Menu
1. Port Usage Statistics Clear
2. Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
3. Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
4. Fax Call Report Clear
Enter the Number : =
7.3.1
Mailbox Assignments
The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the mailbox authorised features
and current parameter settings.
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digits
long.
Installation Manual
135
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
To select the Mailbox Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 1
**Mailbox Assignments
MBOX
510
511
512
520
521
522
523
COS:
CExtn:
AlTrf:
MN2nd:
Bep:
Extn.
21
22
23
310
320
4100
4201
Name (Fir/Lst)
JONE / DELY
SCHE /---------MAY /----------JONE /---------DAVE /--------CLUS / ALCC
WHIT / BLUE
COS
2
2
16
1
1
21
32
Class of Service
Covering Extension
All Call Transfer to Mailbox
Message Notification Device 2
Beeper (Pager)
CExtn
61
62
63
-----
IVMBOX
621
611
612
888
642
AITrf
X
-
IVMBOX:
MN1st:
MN3rd:
Tel:
28-JUL-2002 11:30 AM **
MN1st MN2nd MN3rd
------Bep
Tel
--Tel
Bep
----Tel
Bep
-------------------
Interview Mailbox
Message Notification Device 1
Message Notification Device 3
Telephone
Note
An 'X' displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to "YES."
7.3.2
COS (Class of Service) Assignments
This report provides information concerning all Class of Service numbers.
For a complete explanation of COS parameters, please see Table 36 and Table 37 in Appendix
B3 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
To select the COS Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 2
136
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
* * COS Assignments
COS
1
2
3
GL
16
16
8
63
64
-
RtN RtS
10 10
7 7
7 7
30
30
6
6
Ln
5
3
3
29-JUL-2002 11:30 AM * *
CaN CaT
10 10
10 10
10 10
RO
L
L
F
Un 100 100 L
6 100 100 L
SI
N
Y
Y
SP
N
N
N
N
N
-
CW MC DM
N N N
N N N
N N N
-
-
PG
1
2
3
-
Pr
U1
U1
S
RC DC CN
N N 30
N N 30
N N 30
- U1 N N
- U1 - N
-
GC
Y
Y
Y
CS
Y
Y
Y
MN
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
ED (pr) AF
X U1 X U1 - -
-
(mbox/
-------------
-
COS:
Class of Service number
GL:
Personal Greeting Length
RtN:
New Message Retention
RtS:
Saved Message Retention
Time
Ln:
Message Length Time
(Un=Unlimited)
CaN:
Maximum Message
CaT:
Maximum Message Time
(Un=Unlimited)
RO:
Message Retrieval Order
(L=LIFO, F=FIFO)
SI:
Message Scanning with
Information
SP:
Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting
CW:
Use Call Waiting on Busy
DM:
Direct Mailbox Access
PG:
Intercom Paging Group
Pr:
Prompt Mode (S = System
Prompts, U1 = User 1 Prompts,
U2 = User 2 Prompts)
RC:
Remote Call Forward to CO
DC:
Delete Message Confirmation
CN:
Maximum number of names
for Personal Caller Name
Announcement
GC:
Play Personal Greeting for
Caller ID
CS:
Caller ID Screening
MN:
Authorisation for Message
Waiting Notification
ED (pr):
Authorisation for External
Message Delivery (Prompt
Mode)
(SY= System, U1= User 1,
U2= User 2, SL= Selective)
AF:
Authorisation for Auto
Forwarding
(mbox) = Mailbox No
(dl) = Delay Time
(md) = Forwarding Mode
(M= move, C= copy)
-
dl/ md)
-
-
Note
An "X" displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to "Yes."
Installation Manual
137
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3.3
System Service Report
The System Service Report provides information about the VPS's usable ports, trunk (outside
line) groups and Holiday Services. It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port and
each trunk (outside line) group (for Day, Night, Lunch and Break modes), each Holiday
Service, and all incoming and outgoing call services.
To select the System Service Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 3
** System Service Report
4-JAN-2002 4:37 PM **
Port [Day mode]
Grt Srv
1
1 V.M.
2
1 A.A.
[Night mode] [Lunch mode]
Grt Srv
Grt Srv
2 A.A.
3 V.M.
2 I.S.(700)
3 V.M.
[Break mode]
Grt Srv
4 A.A.
4 A.A.
Trunk [Day mode]
Grt Srv
1 SYS A.A.
2 SYS A.A.
[Night mode] [Lunch mode]
Grt Srv
Grt Srv
SYS V.M.
SYS V.M.
SYS V.M.
SYS V.M.
[Break mode]
Grt Srv
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
[Holiday List]
Name of Holiday
NEW YEAR'S DAY
SPRING HOLIDAY
V.M.:
A.A.:
Grt:
Start
End
Grt
1-JAN
15
24-MAR 5-APR 16
Voice Mail Service
Automated Attendant
Service
Company Greeting
Srv
Port
C.S.(100) 1-2
C.S.(99) 1-2
C.S.:
I.S.:
Trunk
1-24
1-24
Custom Service
Interview Service
Trunk data (Trunks 1 and 2 are shown above) is shown only when 1 (or more) service mode is
not NONE. By default, all trunks for all modes are NONE.
7.3.4
Call Account Report
The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences (for accounting and
billing purposes). Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed
outgoing calls, the telephone numbers called, the call dates, and call duration times. When the
number of outgoing calling sequences reaches 64, the first 10 items are automatically sent to
the terminal. Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system's
memory.
138
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
To select the Call Account Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 4
** Call Account
MBOX:111
MBOX:116
MBOX:114
MBOX:118
MBOX:112
4-JAN
7-JAN
7-JAN
8-JAN
8-JAN
7:46
2:26
5:06
9:07
10:24
PM
PM
PM
AM
AM
00:01:32
00:03:32
00:02:45
00:01:15
00:04:51
14-NOV-2002 3:40 PM**
DIAL:811111111
DIAL:812222222
DIAL:813333333
DIAL:814444444
DIAL:815555555
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digits long.
7.3.5
Port Usage Report
The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port
traffic to be measured. The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and
outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port.
To select the Port Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 5
** Port Usage Report
4-JAN-2002 7:46 PM**
FROM : : 3-JAN-2002 9:53 AM
Port
1
2
Total
ED
8
4
9
MN
0
0
0
Rcv
84
21
105
Connect Time
02:10:19
00:18:54
02:39:13
Full-line Time 00:10:15
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
ED: External Delivery MN: Message Notification
Rcv: Receive
Full-line Time: The total time that both Port 1 and Port 2 were used simultaneously.
Installation Manual
139
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3.6
Port Usage Statistics Clear
Clears the Port Usage Report for use again.
To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 2 - 1
System Reports - System Report Clear - Port Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear port usage report data? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Port
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.7
Flash Memory Usage Report
The Flash Memory Usage Report indicates the amount of flash memory storage used and the
flash memory availability in minutes. It also presents the following statistics:
• The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last
clearing of this report.
• The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report.
• The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers, and expired and were removed
by the system since the last clearing of this report.
• The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last
clearing of this report.
To select the Flash Memory Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 6
** Flash Memory Usage Report
Drive
1
FROM : :
MSGs
140
Avail
118 min
4-JAN-2002 7:46 PM**
Used
2min
3-JAN-2002 9:53 AM
New
Cpy
64
0
(%)
(1)
Del
6
Exp
1
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
With an optional expansion memory card (KX-TVP52)
** Flash Memory Usage Report
Drive
1
2
FROM : :
MSGs
Avail
119 min
120 min
22-JAN-2002 8:30 PM **
Used
1 min
0 min
(%)
(1)
(0)
21-JAN-2002 10:20 PM
New
Cpy
10
0
Del
10
Exp
0
With an optional expansion memory card (KX-TVP54)
** Flash Memory Usage Report
Drive
1
2
FROM : :
MSGs
Avail
119 min
240 min
22-JAN-2002 8:30 PM **
Used
1 min
0 min
(%)
(1)
(0)
21-JAN-2002 10:20 PM
New
Cpy
10
0
Del
10
Exp
0
Drive: Specifies the memory card. "1" is the MASTER memory card (factory provided). "2" is
the SLAVE memory card (optional).
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
Cpy: Copy (Transfer) Del: Deleted Exp: Expired and Removed
7.3.8
Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
The Flash Memory Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Flash Memory Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 2 - 2
System Reports - System Report Clear - Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear flash memory usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Flash
Memory Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
Installation Manual
141
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3.9
Mailbox Usage Report
The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage of a specific mailbox. It
includes the number of recorded messages, the total amount of outgoing calling time, and
external message, message notification and group message delivery.
To select the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 7
Enter the Range : = 111
Note
Specify the range or the mailbox number. To obtain information on specific mailboxes from
No. 200 to No. 209, Type [20 ] and Press RETURN, or [200] [,] [209] and Press RETURN.
** Mailbox Usage Report
MBOX:111 [JONE BLUE]
New
MSGs
4
MSGs
6
Received
MSGs
0
ED
FROM : :
Subscriber Access Time
MBOX Use Time
ED
Feature Usage
11
Outcalling
(Time)
MSG Received
4-JAN-2002 7:46 PM**
3- JAN-2002 9:53 AM
00:00:40
00:00:12 of 01:40:00 ( 1% Used)
MN
IM
GM
31
20
14
LD
6
00:05:10
Lcl
13
00:10:45
Rcv
42
Del
30
Beep
0
00:00:00
AF
22
Extn.
28
00:31:21
Exp
11
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
ED: External Delivery
MN: Message Notification
IM: Interview message
GM: Personal/System Group Distribution List
AF: Auto Forwarding
LD: Long distance call (10 digits or more)
Lcl: Local call (less than 10 digits)
Rcv: Received
Del: Deleted
Exp: Expired
Note
New MSGs/Received MSGs/ED MSGs are current status indications. All else are
accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report.
142
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3.10
Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 2 - 3
System Reports - System Report Clear - Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
Enter the Range : =
May I clear mailbox usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Mailbox
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.11
Fax Call Report
The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax
signal. It includes the fax data receiving date, the port number used, and the fax transfer status
for up to 64 fax messages.
To select the Fax Call Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 1 - 8
** Fax Call Report
[DATE/TIME]
11- JAN
11:15 AM
01-MAR 07:58 PM
01-MAR 10:23 AM
14-NOV-2002 3:50 PM**
[PORT]
1
2
1
FAX-1: Main facsimile machine
[FAX-1]
connect
(busy)
(busy)
[FAX-2]
(no-ans.)
connect
FAX-2: Alternate facsimile machine
connect: Call was answered by the facsimile machine no-ans.: No Answer
Installation Manual
143
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3.12
Fax Call Statistics Clear
The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 2 - 2 - 4
System Reports - System Report Clear - Fax Call Report Clear
May I clear fax call report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Fax
Call Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
144
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 30
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Nothing is heard from the
• Improper connection of jacks. • Confirm that you are using the
VPS when accessing the VPS. • Bad connection with PBX.
correct extension number for
the VPS. Ask your System
Administrator.
• Check if the jacks of the VPS
are connected to the proper
jacks of the PBX (see
1.4 DIGITAL
INTEGRATION).
• Check the System Program
[130] of the KX-TA series
telephone systems to see if the
programming agrees with the
actual connection.
• Check the System Program
[117] or [126] of KX-TD series
telephone systems to see if the
programming agrees with the
actual connection.
Unable to utilize some of the • Your PBX cannot support the
feature.
DPT Integration features,
even though DPT Integration • The software version of your
has been established properly.
PBX is lower than required.
• Consult your dealer.
The VPS does not operate.
• Bad printed circuit board.
• Bad connection with PBX.
• Incomplete card insertion.
• Change the printed circuit
board.
• Check the connection between
the VPS and PBX.
• Insert the card firmly into the
card slot.
Dialling is not registered.
• A pulse phone is being used by • Change to a touch tone phone.
mistake.
• Adjust the integration mode
• Improper setting of integration
properly between the VPS and
mode.
your PBX (see "Integration
Mode" in Table 71 in
B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Installation Manual
145
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 30
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
Line disconnection occurs
• Improper setting of the
while transferring an outside
sequence.
call.
• Improper setting of the
Unable to transfer an outside
hooking time.
call.
• Improper setting of the CPC
signal.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
• Adjust the transfer sequence to
that of the connected PBX and
reset (see "Operator Transfer
Sequence" and "Extension
Transfer Sequence" in Table 72
in B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
• Adjust the hooking time to that
of the connected PBX and reset
(see "Flash Time" in Table 68
in B7.2 Port Setting).
• Adjust the CPC signal to that of
the connected PBX and reset
(see "CPC Signal" in Table 68
in B7.2 Port Setting).
Unable to call an outside
party.
• Improper setting of the outside • Reset the outside (CO) line
call dial procedure.
access sequence of the
connected PBX (see "Dial
Number" in Table 36 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES and "Number of
Digits to Access Outside Line"
in Table 59 in B6.7 Other
Parameters).
• Also check "Outgoing Call
Setup Sequence" in Table 59 in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
Unable to call an extension.
• Improper setting of extension
numbering plan.
Unable to access the mailbox. • Improper setting of the
mailbox number.
146
• Adjust the extension numbering
plan properly (see "Numbering
Plan 1-16" in Table 58 in
B6.7 Other Parameters).
• Re-adjust the number of digits
in the mailbox number (see
"Mailbox Number" in Table 34
in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES).
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 30
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Unable to access to Operator 1 • Improper setting of the
operator extension number.
• Adjust the operator extension
number to that of the connected
PBX (see "Operator's
Extension" in Table 43 in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters).
Connected terminal (RS-232C • Improper connection.
port) does not operate.
• Improper setting of the
parameter.
• Be sure you are using a null
modem cable (see
2.8 TERMINAL
CONNECTION).
• The terminal and VPS should
have the same parameter
settings for Baud Rate, Word
Bit Length, Parity and Stop Bit
Length (see B7.1 RS-232C
Parameters).
Unable to reconnect when the • Improper setting of the busy
• Re-adjust the busy signal
line is busy.
signal reconnection procedure.
reconnection procedure to that
of the connected PBX (see
"Reconnect Sequence on Busy"
in Table 72 in B7.3 PBX
Interface Parameters).
Unable to make a no-response • Improper setting of the noreconnection.
response reconnection
procedure.
• Re-adjust the no-response
reconnection procedure to that
of the connected PBX (see
"Reconnect Sequence on No
Answer" in Table 72 in
B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Unable to generate a call
waiting tone from the VPS.
• Improper setting of sequence.
• Adjust the Call Waiting
sequence to that of the
connected PBX (see "Call
Waiting Sequence" in Table 72
in B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Unable to make an Intercom
Page to groups.
• Improper setting of the
Intercom Paging access code.
• Adjust the Intercom Paging
access code to that of the
connected PBX (see "Paging
Code for Group 1-8" and
"Paging Code for All Groups"
in Table 64 in B6.7 Other
Parameters).
Installation Manual
147
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 31
Port:
2 Digital/Analogue ports
Dialling Method:
Touchtone/Pulse (10/20 pps)
Flash (Recall) Time:
100 ms/300 ms/600 ms/900 ms (programmable)
CPC Detection
6.5 ms/150 ms/300 ms/450 ms/600 ms (programmable)
Type of Line:
Loop start minimum Loop Current: 20 mA
minimum Line Voltage: 7 V DC
minimum Ringing Voltage: 40 V AC
Extension Numbering:
2 to 5 digits (programmable)
Pause Time:
1 s to 9 s (programmable)
Message Waiting Lamp:
Programmable touchtone sequence.
Main CPU:
16-bit microprocessor
Capacity for Flash Memory:
2 h (expandable)
Number of Mailboxes:
Maximum 32 (including System Manager and Message
Manager mailboxes)
Number of Messages:
Maximum 100 per mailbox (programmable)
Personal Greeting Message Length:
8 s to 60 s (programmable)
Message Retention Time:
1 to 30 days or unlimited (programmable)
Maximum Message Length:
1 min to 6 min or unlimited (programmable)
Reports:
Mailbox Assignment, COS (Class of Service) Assignment,
System Service Report, Call Account Report, Port Usage
Report, Flash Memory Usage Report, Mailbox Usage
Report, FAX Call Report
Connections
Telephone Line:
Data Port:
Modular connectors 2
In case of Inband, 2-conductor wire 2
In case of APT, 4-conductor wire with APT interface
In case of DPT, 4-conductor wire with DPT interface
RS-232C interface port
Environmental Requirements:
0 °C - 40 °C, 10 % - 90 % relative humidity
Power Source:
100 V AC - 240 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption:
Approximately 10 W
Dimensions (H
Mass (Weight):
148
W
D):
2
1
173 mm
318 mm
65 mm
Approximately 1.2 kg
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Appendix
A
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual
149
SYSTEM FEATURES
A1
SYSTEM FEATURES
The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the system administrator,
the System Manager, and/or system subscribers. The tables on the following pages list and
briefly describe each key VPS system feature. In addition, references to specific sections of this
manual and the Subscriber Guide are provided in the reference column that pertains to each
feature listed. The specific procedure steps required to initiate, access, or utilise each feature
are detailed in these references.
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may not be
able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, consult your dealer.
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Alternate Extension A group of extensions, which require a
• See "Dialing Parameters" in
Group
different call transfer sequence than normal,
3.2.4 PBX Interface
placed into a separate group.
Parameters.
• See "Alternate Extension
Assignment" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
• See "Alternate Extension
Group" in Glossary.
APT Integration
150
Is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
sent to the VPS from the PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Auto Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing,
Caller Name Announcement (System/
Personal), Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom
paging, Live Call Screening, Personal
Greeting for Caller ID Two-Way Recording,
Two-Way Transfer.
• See "VOICE MAIL" in
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems
are Compatible?.
• See 1.4.1 General.
• See 1.4.2 APT Integration.
• See 1.4.3 Connection
Example — APT Integration.
• See 2.7 CONNECTIONS.
• See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signalling?
• See INTEGRATING THE VPS
WITH THE PANASONIC KXTA ANALOGUE PBX AND
KX-TD DIGITAL PBX.
• See "APT Integration" in
Glossary.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
• See "System Components" in
Auto Configuration Creates mailboxes by obtaining extension
1.3.2 System Components.
(APT/DPT
numbers from the Panasonic KX-TA series or
Integration Only)
KX-TD series telephone system using APT/ • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DPT Integration.
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
Also sets the time and date automatically by • See "Creating Mailboxes" in
obtaining time information from the PBX.
5.1.3 Starting the Quick
Setup.
• See "The length of mailbox
numbers" in 5.1.3 Starting the
Quick Setup.
• See "Auto Configuration" in
Glossary.
Auto Forwarding
Moves or copies un-retrieved messages from • See "Private Message" in this
Table.
one mailbox to another, after a specified
period of time. This service is only available • See "Authorization for Auto
to subscribers (you cannot auto forward
Forwarding" in Table 38 in
messages to the System Group Distribution
B3 SYSTEM
Lists). Class of Service programming
ADMINISTRATION determines the mailboxes that can use this
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
feature. Messages marked as "private" cannot
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
be forwarded. Also, a message is never
• See C3 SETTING COS
forwarded to the original sender of the
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
message.
PARAMETERS.
• See "Auto Forwarding" in
Glossary.
Automated
Attendant
Answers incoming calls and routes those
• See 5.2.10 Automated
calls to the desired extension. The service can
Attendant.
be assigned to all of Day, Night, Lunch, and • See 5.4 AUTOMATED
Break time periods. Available for both Port
ATTENDANT
and Trunk Services.
PARAMETERS.
• See B5.1 Automated
Attendant Parameters.
• See "Automated Attendant" in
Glossary.
Broadcasting
Messages
Permits the System Manager to deliver the
same message to all VPS subscribers at the
same time.
This feature is only available to the System
Manager.
Installation Manual
• See "Delivering Messages to All
Mailboxes (Broadcasting
Messages)" in
C8 DELIVERING
MESSAGES.
151
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Busy Coverage
Mode
Specifies how the VPS will handle calls to the • See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
operator when the line is busy. The Busy
Table 22 in 5.4.3 Operator's
Parameters.
Coverage options that are available include:
Hold, No Answer Coverage, Call Waiting,
• See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
and Disconnect Message.
Tables 43, 44 and 45 in
B5 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS.
Call Services
Include a series of both incoming and
• See "Port Service Setting" in
outgoing call services.
5.1.3 Starting the Quick
Incoming Call Services: Automated
Setup.
Attendant Service, Voice Mail Service,
• See "Incoming Call Service" in
Interview Service, Custom Service.
Table 21 in 5.3.1 Port Service
Outgoing Call Services: Message Waiting
Menu.
Notification, and External Message Delivery.
• See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table 40 in B4.1 Port
Assignment.
• See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table 41 in B4.2 Trunk Group
Assignment.
Call Transfer Status Permits subscribers to specify how the VPS
will handle calls to their individual
extensions. Call Transfer Status options
include: Call Screening, Call Blocking,
Intercom Paging, and Calling a Beeper
(Pager).
• See "Calling a Beeper (Pager)"
and "Intercom Paging (APT/
DPT Integration Only)" in this
Table.
• See "Call Transfer" in Glossary.
• See 4.1 Call Transfer Status in
the Subscriber's Guide.
152
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Callback Number
Entry
Enables the caller to leave a callback number • See "Notification Setting" in
in several different ways depending upon
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION which option is programmed into the VPS.
The VPS can forward the callback number to
MAILBOXES.
a beeper (pager).
• See "Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode" in Tables 38 and 39 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See "Other Parameters-Message
Waiting Notification" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Caller ID Call
Routing
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
Allows the System Administrator to assign • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
up to 120 Caller ID numbers and program the
route for the calls from these assigned
• See B5.3 Caller ID Call
numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
Routing Parameters.
(System Group Distribution List included) or
• See "Caller ID Call Routing" in
Custom Service.
Glossary.
The Company Greetings will not play when
calls are routed as programmed by this
feature.
Caller ID Screening Allows extension users to hear prerecorded • See "Caller Name
(APT/DPT
caller names when calls from assigned
Announcement—Personal" and
Integration Only)
numbers are transferred from the VPS to the
"Caller Name Announcement—
extension users.
System" in this Table.
Installation Manual
153
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Caller Name
Announcement—
Personal
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
Allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
ID numbers and record a caller name for each
Caller ID number from their telephone. The • See "Number of CIDs for Caller
caller name is announced when: (1)
Name Announcement" and
subscribers listen to the messages from
"Caller ID Screening" in Table
assigned numbers left in their mailboxes, (2)
38 in B3 SYSTEM
the VPS transfers calls from assigned
ADMINISTRATION numbers to the subscribers (Caller ID
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
subscribers by intercom (Intercom Paging).
• See C3 SETTING COS
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
PARAMETERS.
• See "Caller Name
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
Announcement (System/
for both the system and personal caller name
Personal)" in Glossary.
announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
• See 4.12 Personal Caller Name
Announcement in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Caller Name
Announcement—
System
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
Allows the System Administrator to assign
up to 120 Caller ID numbers. Each Caller ID
number can have a caller name recorded by
the Message Manager. The caller name is
announced when: (1) extension users listen to
the messages from assigned numbers left in
their mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls
from assigned numbers to the subscribers
(Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages
the subscribers by intercom (Intercom
Paging).
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
154
• See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
• See "Caller ID Screening" in
Table 38 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See B6.6 System Caller Name
Announcement.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Recording System Caller
Names" in D6 RECORDING
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
MESSAGES.
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal • See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
caller name.
Personal)" in Glossary.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Calling a Beeper
(Pager)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper • See "Dial Number" and "Type
of Device" in Table 36 in
(pager) when he has message(s). If the beeper
B2 SYSTEM
(pager) has a display, it is possible to send to
ADMINISTRATION it a callback number. The callback number
MAILBOXES.
can be recorded when a caller leaves a
message. If the caller does not leave a
• See "Authorization for Message
callback number, the System Callback No., or
Notification" and "Beeper
the caller's number if it is received through
Callback No. Entry Mode" in
the telephone company's Caller ID service,
Tables 38 and 39 in
will be sent instead.
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION To utilise this feature, follow the procedure
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
below.
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See "System Callback Number"
1)
in Table 61 in B6.7 Other
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
Parameters.
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
• See C3 SETTING COS
COS No.(1-63).
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
Select "Yes" in the Authorization for
PARAMETERS.
Message Notification parameter. Make 1
selection from the available options in the
Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode parameter.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-1-1-Mailbox No.-Y-2-Device No.(13) (Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/EditMailbox No. Entry-Do you want to edit this
mailbox?-Notification Setting-Device No.
Entry).
For the Dial Number parameter: enter your
PBX's line access code before the beeper
(pager) number for dialling outward; enter an
X after the beeper (pager) number. (The X is
for the caller to enter his number as the
callback number which will later appear on
your beeper (pager).) Finally, select "Beeper"
in the Type of Device parameter.
Installation Manual
155
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Class of Service
(COS)
• See 7.3.2 COS (Class of
There are 62 COS levels for subscribers.
Service) Assignments.
COS 63 is for the Message Manager and COS
64 is for the System Manager.
• See B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
Either the System Administrator (using a
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
personal computer) or the System Manager
(using a telephone) can change COS
• See "Creating and Editing a
assignments.
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Company Greeting
Is a prerecorded message designed to greet all • See 6.1.3 Company Greetings
incoming callers and provide relevant
(Enter #6*998,5,1).
information. This feature allows the use of up • See C6 CHANGING THE
to 32 different greetings for each individual
COMPANY GREETING
Time Service period (Day, Night, Lunch and
SETTING.
Break) as well as holidays*. Available for
• See "Company Greeting No." in
both Port and Trunk services.
Tables 40 and 41 in
B4 SYSTEM
Note: The System Manager can change the
ADMINISTRATION - PORT/
Company Greeting setting remotely by
TRUNK SERVICE.
simply calling the VPS.
• See "Company Greeting No." in
Table 55 in B6.3 Holiday
*: Only the System Administrator can assign
Setting.
specific greetings for holidays.
• See D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
• See "Company Greeting" in
Glossary.
Company Name
• See D6 RECORDING
Is used by External Message Delivery
MESSAGES.
Service when the intended receiver enters the
password incorrectly 3 times. The VPS
• See "Company Name" in
announces the Company Name so that the
Glossary.
receiver realises what company placed the
call to him.
• See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
156
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Covering Extension Forwards calls to a second extension when • See "Covering Extension" in
the first extension's subscriber is not available
Table 35 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION to take the call. The caller can also access the
Covering Extension by pressing [0] while the
MAILBOXES.
Personal Greeting is being played, or while • See "Covering Extension" in
leaving a message.
Glossary.
• See 4.2 Covering Extension in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Custom Service
Allows callers to access specific functions by • See 5.2 PORT SETTING
entering numbers or symbols through the
OPTIONS.
telephone keypad.
• See 6.1.5 Custom Service
Greetings (Enter [#6*998,5,4]).
The Message Manager can record up to 100
• See 7.2.11 Custom Service
Custom Service menus. These menus can be
Report (CREP).
recorded in various foreign languages, and
• See 7.2.12 Custom Service
help guide outside callers to the desired
Menu Access Count Clear
extension, mailbox, System Group
(CCLR).
Distribution List, Department Dialling menu,
• See B5.2 Custom Service.
operator, fax machine, etc.
• See "Recording Menus and
Note: Callers cannot jump between Custom
Voice Labels" in
Service menus more than 8 times.
D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
• See "Custom Service Setting" in
Glossary.
Daylight Saving
Time Assignment
Changes the internal clock of the VPS for the • See B6.4 Daylight Saving
start and end of Daylight Saving Time.
Time (DST).
Delete Message
Confirmation
Requests confirmation from mailbox owner • See "Delete Message
before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
Confirmation" in Tables 38 and
39 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
COS (Class of Service) settings.
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Installation Manual
157
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Department Dialling Is a speed-dialling feature that permits the
• See 5.4.2 Department
caller to quickly reach the desired extension
Dialling.
by dialling a 1 digit number either during or • See "Department Dialing" in
after the playing of the Department Dialling
B5.1 Automated Attendant
message.
Parameters.
• See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in
D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
• See "Department Dialling" in
Glossary.
• See "Owner Last Name" in
Table 35 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES.
Dialing by Name
Allows the caller to reach the intended
mailbox/extension (when the number is not
known) by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of
the mailbox owner's last name. The VPS
identifies all subscribers with that letter
combination and states each name for the
caller. The caller selects the desired
subscriber by entering the appropriate name
using the letters on their keypad.
Direct Mailbox
Access
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
Allows subscribers to call the VPS and access • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
their mailbox without entering the mailbox
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
number.
• See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
Table 38 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
Glossary.
158
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
• See "Voice Mail" in
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems
are Compatible?
• See 1.4.1 General.
• See 1.4.4 DPT Integration.
• See 1.4.5 Connection
Example — DPT Integration.
• See 2.7 CONNECTIONS.
• See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signalling?
• See Section 4 INTEGRATING
Note: Depending on the model and/or the
THE VPS WITH THE
software version of the connected PBX, you
PANASONIC KX-TA
may not be able to utilise some of the features
ANALOGUE PBX AND KXavailable only with DPT Integration. For
TD DIGITAL PBX.
more information, consult your dealer.
• See "DPT Integration" in
Glossary.
DPT Integration
Is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
transmitted between the VPS and PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Remote Call Forwarding Set, Auto
Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing, Caller
Name Announcement (System/Personal),
Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging,
Live Call Screening, Personal Greeting for
Caller ID, Time Synchronisation with PBX,
Two-Way Record and Two-Way Transfer.
Extension Group
Places several extensions into the same
mailbox to share information using an
Extension Group List. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
maximum of 20 entries on each.
• See 5.2.8 Extension Groups.
• See "System Group
Assignment-Extension Group"
in B6.1 System Group
Assignment.
Extension
Numbering Plan
Permits the VPS to recognise an extension
number as valid.
• See "Other ParametersExtension Numbering Plan" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
External Message
Delivery List
• See "External Message Delivery
Allows a subscriber to send a message to
Service" in this Table.
outside parties and/or extensions with a
single operation. One subscriber can maintain • See "External Delivery
up to 2 lists with a maximum of 8 entries on
Message", "External Message
each.
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
This feature is only available when External
Glossary.
Message Delivery has been authorised for the
subscriber's COS.
• See 3.3 Setting up an External
Message Delivery List in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Installation Manual
159
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
External Message
Delivery Service
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Allows a subscriber to send a message to
several subscribers and non-subscribers
(including outside parties) at a specified time
(or immediately). This feature also permits
the receiver to reply to the message without
having to specify the mailbox number.
If the sender wishes, he can require the
receiver to enter a 4-digit password to receive
the sender's message. If the receiver enters
the password incorrectly 3 times, the VPS: (1)
plays the Company Name (if it has been
recorded), (2) plays the Callback Telephone
Number (if registered), and (3) plays the
sender's extension (if both the Callback
Telephone Number and the Extension of the
Owner have been registered). With this
information, the receiver can possibly track
down the message even if he does not
remember the password.
• See "The Extension of the
Owner" in Table 35 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES.
• See "Authorization for External
Message Delivery" in Table 38
in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See "Other Parameters-External
Message Delivery" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
Glossary.
COS programming determines whether this
feature can be used or not.
• See 3.4 Sending External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
• See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
• See 3.6 Replying to External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
External Message
Delivery Status
Allows the subscriber to check the status of • See "External Message Delivery
Service" in this Table.
undelivered and pending external delivery
messages.
• See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorised for the
Delivery List", and "External
subscriber's COS.
Message Delivery Redial" in
Glossary.
• See 3.7 Checking and Setting
External Message Delivery
Status in the Subscriber's Guide.
160
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Fax Management
Allows the VPS to automatically route an
incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine.
Up to 2 fax machines can be assigned using
this feature. Outside callers can also reach the
fax machine via Custom Service selection, if
programmed.
A special mailbox can be assigned to the Fax
Manager. In this way, the VPS can notify the
Fax Manager of the status of faxes.
• See "Fax Management (1-5-78)" in 5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
• See 7.3.11 Fax Call Report.
• See 7.3.12 Fax Call Statistics
Clear.
• See "Other Parameters-Fax
Management" in B6.7 Other
Parameters.
Group Distribution
List—Personal
Allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a • See "Group Distribution List—
message to several mailboxes using a Group
System" in this Table.
Distribution List. This list is established by • See "Personal Group
the subscriber. Each subscriber can maintain
Distribution List" in Glossary.
a maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on
each list.
• See 4.5 Personal Group
Distribution Lists in the
Subscriber's Guide.
• See 4.6 Deleting Group
Distribution Members in the
Subscriber's Guide.
• See 4.7 Deleting Group
Distribution List Names in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Group Distribution
List—System
• See "System Group
Allows a subscriber to send a message to
Assignment-Mailbox Group" in
several mailboxes using a Group Distribution
B6.1 System Group
List. Also allows a caller to record a message
Assignment.
into all mailboxes within the list. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
• See C8 DELIVERING
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
MESSAGES.
maximum of 20 entries on each.
• See "System Group Distribution
List" in Glossary.
Hold
• See "Other Parameters-Call
Provides the caller with the option of
Hold" in B6.7 Other
temporarily holding the call when the line is
Parameters.
busy. The VPS automatically recalls the
extension after a specified period of time.
When several callers hold for the same
extension, callers are connected in the order
in which they originally called.
Installation Manual
161
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Holiday Service
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Permits the VPS to record, store, and play
• See B6.3
several different holiday greetings. Up to 20
Holiday Service settings can be programmed.
Holiday Setting.
It is possible to either specify a single day or
a range of days on which to enable the
Holiday Service setting.
Note: Holidays cannot overlap.
• See "Voice Mail" in
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems
are Compatible?
• See 2.7 CONNECTIONS.
• See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signalling?.
• See Section 3 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS.
• See "Inband Signalling" in
Glossary.
Inband Integration
Allows the PBX, using Inband Integration, to
send information to the VPS using
Touchtones. Inband integration is
characterised as Voice Mail Integration and
Touchtone Integration. Voice Mail
Integration works with the Call Forwarding
Feature of the PBX to permit a caller to leave
a message when the mailbox number of the
called extension is not known. Touchtone
Integration works with the Automated
Attendant Service to enable the VPS to
immediately recognise the state of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) and improve
its call handling performance.
Incomplete Call
Handling Service
Allows the subscriber to offer callers several • See "Calling a Beeper (Pager)"
and "Intercom Paging (APT/
service options when the extension is busy or
DPT Integration Only)" in this
there is no answer: Leaving a Message,
Table.
Transfer to Covering Extension, Returning to
the Automated Attendant Top Menu,
• See "Incomplete Call Handling
Intercom Paging, Calling a Beeper (Pager), or
Service" in Glossary.
Calling Operators.
• See 4.3 Incomplete Call
Handling Status in the
Subscriber's Guide.
162
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Intercom Paging
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Permits callers to page subscribers by PBX
paging (there are different kinds of PBX
paging, and these can be specified by VPS
programming) when the subscribers have set
Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when
the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for
Incomplete Call Handling. The caller is
briefly placed on hold while the VPS
announces the page and until the subscriber
answers the page. The subscriber can answer
the page from any extension using the paging
answer code; this code is specified in the PBX
User Manual. For a Caller ID Caller, if his
name has been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature, the name will be
announced at the end of the page. If the
caller's name has been recorded for both the
System and Personal Caller Name
Announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
• See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
• See "Intercom Paging (1-5-7-7)"
in 5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
• See "Intercom Paging Group" in
Table 38 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See "Other Parameters-Intercom
Paging Parameter" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
• See "Intercom Paging" in
Glossary.
To utilise this feature, follow the procedure
below.
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
COS No.(1-62). Select an Intercom Paging
Group (1-9) for this COS. If set to Group 9,
the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-5-7-7 (Program-System Parameter
Setting-Others-Intercom Paging Parameters).
Adjust the "No Answer Time for Intercom
Paging" to your preference (the default is 5 s).
For the Intercom Paging Group you selected
in Step 1, set the Intercom Paging access code
in "Paging Code for Group 1-8" and "Paging
Code for All Groups".
Installation Manual
163
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Interview Service
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Plays a set of recorded questions when a
• See 5.2.9 Interview Service.
caller accesses the service. The caller is
• See "Interview Mailbox
provided an opportunity to answer each
Number" in Table 35 in
question after it has been asked. Subscribers
B2 SYSTEM
are able to record questions directly into their
ADMINISTRATION own Interview Mailbox.
MAILBOXES.
• See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
• See "Interview Service" in
Glossary.
• See 4.9 Interview Mailbox in the
Subscriber's Guide.
164
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Live Call Screening Permits the subscriber to monitor incoming • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
(APT/DPT
calls as messages are being recorded. The
Integration Only)
subscriber has the option of answering calls • See 4.4.1 Live Call Screening
while monitoring or allowing the message to
(LCS) Programming.
be recorded without interruption. There are
• See 4.4.2 Live Call Screening
two modes in this feature: Hands-free and
Recording Mode Assignment.
Private.
• See 4.4.3 Live Call Screening
Private/Hands-Free Mode
Hands-free permits the subscriber to hear the
Assignment.
caller through the telephone's speaker and
• See 4.4.4 Live Call Screening
answer the call by lifting the handset. The
Button Assignment.
Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the
• See 4.4.5 Live Call Screening
telephone handset to be lifted before the
Cancel Button Assignment.
message can be monitored. Two-way
communication is established by pressing the • See 4.4.6 Live Call Screening
feature button.
Password Assignment.
• See 4.4.7 Live Call Screening
Password Cancellation.
• See 4.4.8 Live Call Screening
Password Control.
• See "Message Cancel for Live
Call Screening" in Table 38 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Live Call Screening" in
Glossary.
• See 4.13 Live Call Screening in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Installation Manual
165
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Logical Extension
(All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox)
Is an extension that always receives calls
• See "All Calls Transfer to
directly into its mailbox. This feature is used
Mailbox" in Table 35 in
by subscribers that are often unavailable or
B2 SYSTEM
that do not have a telephone.
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES.
• See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
• See "Logical Extension" in
Glossary.
Mailbox
Is a place where all messages to a subscriber • See 5.5 SETTING
MAILBOXES.
are stored. Several mailbox options exist:
Subscriber Mailbox, Interview Mailbox,
• See 6.2 SETTING UP
System Manager's Mailbox, and Message
MAILBOXES.
Manager's Mailbox (General Delivery
• See 7.3.1 Mailbox
Mailbox).
Assignments.
• See 7.3.9 Mailbox Usage
Report.
• See 7.3.10 Mailbox Usage
Statistics Clear.
• See B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES.
• See C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
• See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Message Delivery,
Internal
166
Allows the VPS to automatically deliver a
single message to multiple mailboxes.
• See "Group Distribution List—
Personal", "Group Distribution
List—System" and "Message
Delivery Status" in this Table.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Message Delivery
Status
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
• See 3.2 Checking Mailbox
Allows a subscriber to check the status of
Distribution in the Subscriber's
messages that have been sent. The sending
Guide.
subscriber has the option of cancelling any of
the messages after checking their status. If a
recorded message has not been received, the
VPS will voice report the following: the
message's destination mailbox number and its
contents.
Message delivery status information is
automatically deleted after the message has
been received by the subscriber, or when the
subscriber cancels the delivery, or when a
new message arrives after 84 delivery status
messages have been stored in the subscriber's
mailbox (the oldest status message is always
deleted first).
Message Reception Allows incoming calls to be received by
• See "Interview Service" and
Mode
either a subscriber's regular or interview
"Logical Extension (All Calls
mailbox.
Transfer to Mailbox)" in this
Table.
This mode is effective for: (1) Incomplete
Call Handling Service (when the subscriber's • See "All Calls Transfer to
line is busy, or he cannot take the call, or
Mailbox" in Table 35 in
when he has enabled Call Blocking), and (2)
B2 SYSTEM
when the transfer destination of calls is set to
ADMINISTRATION a Logical Extension.
MAILBOXES.
• See 4.4 Message Reception
Mode in the Subscriber's Guide.
Message Scan
Permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of • See "Message Scanning with
each message. The subscriber can replay the
Information" in Table 38 in
previous message, play the next message, or
B3 SYSTEM
play the entire message.
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Scanning Messages" in
Glossary.
• See 2.1 Receiving Messages in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Installation Manual
167
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Message Transfer
Allows the subscriber to transfer messages to • See "Transferring Messages" in
D2 MANAGING THE
other mailboxes after playing. The subscriber
GENERAL DELIVERY
can also add a personal comment at the
MAILBOX.
beginning of the message to be transferred if
desired.
• See "Message Transfer" in
Glossary.
One or more individual mailboxes can be
specified for message transfer. Messages can
also be transferred using either the System or
• See 2.3 Message Transfer in the
Personal Group Distribution Lists.
Subscriber's Guide.
Message Waiting
Notification—
Device
• See "Message Waiting
Automatically notifies the subscriber/
Notification from an SLT" in
Message Manager of the reception of new
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for
message(s) by calling either a specified
Integration.
telephone or beeper (pager) number. The
message will automatically play when the
• See "Notification Setting" in
subscriber/Message Manager answers a call
B2 SYSTEM
to the telephone. When a beeper (pager) is
ADMINISTRATION called, the subscriber/Message Manager must
MAILBOXES.
call the VPS and access the message from the
• See "Authorisation for Message
mailbox. Notification can be scheduled either
Notification" in Tables 38 and
on or off for a maximum of 2 times during
39 in B3 SYSTEM
any 24 h period.
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
The subscriber/Message Manager can
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
program a maximum of 3 telephones or
• See "Other Parameters-Message
beepers (pagers) in sequence. The VPS will
Waiting Notification" in
recall the number or number sequence for a
B6.7 Other Parameters.
specified number of times until answered.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
Notification is terminated when the
PARAMETERS.
subscriber/Message Manager has received
the message, when the last number has been • See D3 SETTING UP
MESSAGE WAITING
called a specified number of times, or at the
NOTIFICATION.
completion of the programmed time period.
• See "Message Waiting
Notification" in Glossary.
• See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber's
Guide.
168
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Message Waiting
Automatically illuminates the message
• See "Message Waiting
Notification—Lamp waiting lamp on the subscriber's or the
Notification from an SLT" in
Message Manager's telephone when there are
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for
unplayed messages waiting in the mailbox.
Integration.
• See 7.2.13 Message Waiting
Lamp Retry Times (MWL).
Note: The extension assigned for Operator 1
in the Day Mode is the Message Manager's • See "MWL Notification for
telephone. However, its default extension
Unreceived Message" in Tables
number (0) cannot be used with this feature.
38 and 39 in B3 SYSTEM
When using this feature, you must assign the
ADMINISTRATION extension number that is included in the
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
Extension Numbering Plan.
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See "Other Parameters-Message
Waiting Notification" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See D3 SETTING UP
MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION.
• See "Message Waiting Lamp" in
Glossary.
• See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Multilingual Service Permits up to 3 languages to be used for
prompt options. If the "Selective" mode is
selected, callers are able to choose their
desired language.
Installation Manual
• See "Incoming Call Service
Prompt" in Table 21 in
5.3.1 Port Service Menu.
• See "System/User 1/User 2
Selection Number" in Table 57
in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
• See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" and "Recording
User Prompts" in
D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
• See "Multilingual Selection
Menu" in Glossary.
169
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
No Answer
Coverage Mode
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Specifies how the calls will be handled when • See "No Answer Coverage
Operator 1, 2 and/or 3 do not answer them
Mode" in Table 22 in
within the specified "Operator No Answer
5.4.3 Operator's Parameters.
Time". There are 4 options:
• See "No Answer Coverage
Caller Select*1—caller may leave a message
Mode" in Tables 43, 44 and 45
or call another extension.
in B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
Leave Message*1—caller may leave a
message in Operators' mailbox.
Disconnect Message*1—caller is
disconnected from the VPS after hearing
"Thank you for calling."
Next Operator*2—caller is transferred to the
next operator (Operator 2 or 3) extension.
*1: Assignable for Operator 1, 2 and 3
*2: Assignable for Operator 1 and 2
Operator Service
Permits callers to request a live operator by • See 5.4.3 Operator's
pressing [0] on the telephone keypad. Up to 3
Parameters.
operators can be specified to receive calls in • See "Operator's Parameters" in
the Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
• See "Operator's Extensions" in
D4 CUSTOMISING THE
MESSAGE MANAGER'S
MAILBOX.
Password
Administration
Allows the System Administrator or System • See 5.5.4 Password Reset.
Manager to clear a subscriber password (so • See "Deleting a Mailbox
that a new one can be assigned).
Password" in C2 SETTING
UP MAILBOXES.
PBX Integration
Allows the VPS and PBX to work together as • See 2.7 CONNECTIONS.
an integrated unit. Three integration options • See Section 3 INTEGRATING
are available: Inband Integration, APT
THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
Integration and DPT Integration.
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS.
• See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA
ANALOGUE PBX AND KXTD DIGITAL PBX.
170
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Personal Greeting
for Caller ID
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Permits subscribers to record up to 4 personal • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
greetings for calls from pre-assigned Caller
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
ID numbers. Each greeting supports up to 8 • See "Personal Greeting Length"
caller ID numbers.
and "Personal Greeting for CID"
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
in Table 38 in B3 SYSTEM
COS (Class of Service) settings.
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Personal Greeting for
Caller ID" in Glossary.
• See 4.10 Recording Personal
Greetings for Caller ID in the
Subscriber's Guide.
• See 4.11 Assigning Caller ID
Numbers for Personal Greeting
for Caller ID in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Personal Greetings
Installation Manual
Permit the subscriber to record the following • See 6.2.1 Recording Personal
3 personal message greetings:
Greetings.
No Answer—Plays when unavailable to
• See "Personal Greeting Length"
answer the call during business hours.
in Table 38 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION Busy Signal—Plays whenever the line is
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
busy.
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
After Hours—Plays when the VPS is in the
• See C3 SETTING COS
Night Mode.
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
The No Answer Greeting will also play:
• See "Personal Greetings" in
• when the caller accesses the mailbox
Glossary.
directly.
• when the Busy Signal or the After Hours
• See 1.2 Recording Personal
Greeting has not been recorded.
Greetings in the Subscriber's
Guide.
171
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Play System Prompt Allows the "Guidance for Recording"
• See "Play System Prompt after
After Personal
message to be played for the caller after the
Personal Greeting" in Table 38
in B3 SYSTEM
Greeting
"Personal Greeting". The "Guidance for
Recording" message instructs the caller how
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
to terminate the call, access more features,
and re-record the message.
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See 5.2 PORT SETTING
OPTIONS.
• See B4 SYSTEM
The incoming call service determines which
ADMINISTRATION - PORT/
service is used when answering incoming
TRUNK SERVICE.
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
Port Service
Allows assignment of call services to each
port.
Private Message
Allows a subscriber and the System Manager • See "Delivering Messages to
Specified Mailboxes" in
to specify a message as "Private" when
C8 DELIVERING
sending it to other subscribers, the Message
MESSAGES.
Manager and/or the System Manager. A
message specified as "Private" cannot be
• See "Private Message" in
transferred. It is also possible to specify
Glossary.
messages recorded in the Voice Mail Service
as "Private".
• See 3.1 Delivering Messages to
Other Subscribers in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Receive Message
Allows subscribers to access messages left in • See "Message Transfer" and
their mailboxes. Three options are available
"Message Scan" in this Table.
to subscribers:
Reply to Message Sender—permits
• See 2.1 Receiving Messages in
subscribers to reply to the message sender
the Subscriber's Guide.
without specifying the extension.
• See 2.2 Replying to Messages in
Message Transfer—permits subscribers to
the Subscriber's Guide.
transfer their messages to other mailboxes.
Message Scan—permits subscribers to listen
to the first 4 s of each message.
172
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Remote Call
Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration
only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Allows a subscriber and the Message
Manager to program his extension from a
remote location to forward various types of
calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone.
There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number.
FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number when the line is
busy.
FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming
calls to a desired extension number when
there is no answer.
FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all
incoming calls to a desired extension number
when the line is busy or there is no answer.
FWD to CO*—Forward all incoming calls
to the Telephone number 1 or 2 (programmed
in the Mailbox Setting), or to any other
number.
FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding
setting.
• See 5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox.
• See "Remote Call Forward to
CO Setting" in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES.
• See "Remote Call Forward to
CO" in Tables 38 and 39 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See D7 REMOTE CALL
FORWARDING SET.
• See "Remote Call Forwarding
Set" in Glossary.
• See 4.16 Remote Call
Forwarding Set in the
Subscriber's Guide.
*: Must be enabled in the COS (Class of
Service) settings to be utilised.
With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is
disabled. To enable VPS Remote Call
Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for example,
must be programmed properly. For the
COS of the extensions whose calls are to be
forwarded to an outside (CO) line, enable
the following: [504] Call Forward to
Outside Line.
Note: The extension assigned for Operator 1
in the Day Mode is the Message Manager's
extension. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this feature.
When using this feature, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
Installation Manual
173
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Rotary Telephone
Service
Provides guidance to callers using rotary
telephone systems or when several seconds
pass without anything being entered by the
caller.
• See "Other Parameters-Rotary
Telephone Service" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
• See "Rotary Telephone" in
Glossary.
Service Access
Commands
Allow the caller to directly access several
standard features.
• See 5.2.6 Voice Mail.
• See 5.2.10 Automated
Attendant.
(0) to repeat the Help Menu or call the
operator
( ) to return to previous menu
(#) (1) to dial by name
(#) (3) Department Dialling
(#) (5) Login
(#) (6) Voice Mail Service
(#) (7) to restart (Subscriber's main menu)
(#) (8) to call transfer
(#) (9) to exit
Service Mode
174
• See 1.5 Service Access
Commands in the Subscriber's
Guide.
• See "Time Service" in this
Allows the System Administrator or the
Table.
System Manager to change the call handling
method that is programmed in the Time
• See "Time Service-Service
Service setting.
Mode" in B6.2 Time Service.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it • See C5 CHANGING THE
is retained unless the System Manager or
SERVICE MODE SETTING.
System Administrator changes it again, even
after the power turns off.
There are 6 Service Modes available:
Automatic Mode—Operates according to
the setting in Time Service.
Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day
Mode.
Manual Night Mode—Operates only in
Night Mode.
Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in
Lunch Mode.
Manual Break Mode—Operates only in
Break Mode.
PBX Control Mode—Operation changes
depending on PBX time period (APT/DPT
Integration only).
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Special Feature
Authorisation
Permits mailbox owners to use the following • See "Remote Call Forward to
CO", "Delete Message
special features: Remote Call Forward to CO,
Confirmation", "Authorization
Delete Message Confirmation, Message
for Message Notification",
Waiting Notification, External Message
"Authorization for External
Delivery, and Auto Forwarding.
Message Delivery", and
"Authorization for Auto
But the Message Manager can only utilise the
Forwarding" in Table 38 in
following features: Remote Call Forward to
B3 SYSTEM
CO, Delete Message Confirmation, and
ADMINISTRATION Message Waiting Notification; and the
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
System Manager can only utilise the Delete
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
Message Confirmation feature.
• See "Remote Call Forward to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", and
"Authorization for Message
Notification" in Table 39 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
System Clock
Allows the correct setting of the date and time • See 7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).
to be made for proper VPS operation.
• See C4 SETTING THE
SYSTEM CLOCK.
• See D5 SETTING THE
SYSTEM CLOCK.
System Reports
• See 7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS.
Eight System Reports are available to the
System Administrator and System Manager • See C7 CHECKING
to monitor VPS operating status. These
SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM
reports include: Mailbox Assignments, COS
REPORTS).
Assignments, System Service Report, Call
• See "System Report" in
Account Report, Port Usage Report, Flash
Glossary.
Memory Usage Report, Mailbox Usage
Report, and the Fax Call Report.
Installation Manual
175
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Time Service
Is a timer function that initiates the
• See "Service Mode" in this
appropriate call handling method depending
table.
on the time of day: Day, Night, Lunch, and • See "Time Service (1-5-2-2)" in
Break Service periods.
5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
• See "Time Service-Time
Service" in B6.2 Time
Service.
Time
Synchronisation
(DPT Integration
only)
Occurs between the VPS and PBX when the • See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
PBX sets a new date and time, or when DPT
Integration is established. The date and time • See 7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).
are automatically sent from the PBX to the
• See "Time Synchronisation" in
VPS.
Glossary.
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
Allows call services to be assigned to each
trunk (outside line) group.
Two-Way
Recording
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
Permits a subscriber to record two-way
conversations into his mailbox.
• See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
• See B4 SYSTEM
The incoming call service determines which
ADMINISTRATION - PORT/
service is used when answering incoming
TRUNK SERVICE.
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
• See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
• See 4.4.9 TWR (Two-Way
Recording) into One's Own
Mailbox.
• See 4.4.10 TWR (Two-Way
Recording) Button Assignment.
• See "Two-Way Recording" in
Glossary.
• See 4.14 Recording a Two-Way
Conversation in the Subscriber's
Guide.
176
Installation Manual
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Two-Way Transfer
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Permits a subscriber to record two-way
• See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
conversations into another person's mailbox.
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
• See 4.4.11 TWT (Two-Way
Transfer) into Mailbox.
• See 4.4.12 TWT (Two-Way
Transfer) Button Assignment.
• See "Two-Way Transfer" in
Glossary.
• See 4.14 Recording a Two-Way
Conversation in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Unlimited Message Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way • See "Two-Way Recording" and
"Two-Way Transfer" in this
Length
conversations of unlimited length into his or
table.
another person's mailbox (Two-Way
Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The
• See "Message Length" in Tables
maximum recording time for other messages
38 and 39 in B3 SYSTEM
will automatically be set to 6 min.
ADMINISTRATION To allow unlimited recording time, the
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
"Message Length" parameter must be set to
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
"0: Unlimited" in the COS (Class of Service)
• See C3 SETTING COS
settings.
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Unlimited Message
Length" in Glossary.
Utility Commands
Allow the System Administrator to access
critical VPS functions.
• See 7.2 UTILITY
COMMANDS.
Voice Mail Service
Permits a caller/non-subscriber to leave a
message in any mailbox.
• See 5.2.6 Voice Mail.
• See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION - PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
• See "Voice Mail" in Glossary.
Installation Manual
177
SYSTEM FEATURES
Table 32
FEATURE
Voice Prompts
DESCRIPTION
Are announcements that instruct the caller.
There are 3 kinds of voice prompts:
(1) System Prompts (recorded at the factory
in English)
(2) User 1 Prompts (not recorded)
(3) User 2 Prompts (not recorded)
178
REFERENCES
• See 6.1.6 Customising User
Prompts (Enter [#6*998,5,6]).
• See " Prompt Mode" in Tables
38 and 39 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS
• See B6.5 Prompt Setting.
• See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
• See "Recording User Prompts"
in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
• See "Voice Prompt" in
Glossary.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Appendix
B
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual
179
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B1
SYSTEM NAVIGATION
System Administration, which includes the setting and changing of system parameters, is
performed using an RS-232C ASCII or VT terminal. This can be a personal computer with
emulation software.
Keyboard Use
Menu options are chosen by Typing the number of the option desired and Pressing RETURN.
Table 33
KEY
FUNCTIONS
(1) - (9), then
(RETURN)
Typing any number 1 through 9 will select
the corresponding option for that number.
Pressing RETURN will select the number
entered.
(\)
Exits the current screen and returns to the
previous step within the menu.
Backspace
Used to correct any mis-typed entry.
Using the Interface
Programming Guidance
Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens. The Programming Menu
Structure Diagram on the following page depicts this menu flow. A menu flow is shown at the
beginning of each section. The menu flow corresponds to the Programming Menu Structure
Diagram on the following pages. This flow is designed to guide the user through the
appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or changed. The following example illustrates
how the menu flow is used.
Example:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 1
1. Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu. Press RETURN.
2. Press 4 at the Program Menu. Press RETURN.
3. Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu. Press RETURN.
4. Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select "1. Department Dialing," when selected.
5. Press RETURN. Auto. Attn-Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal.
180
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
1. Program
1. Mallbox
Setting
2. Class of
Service
3. Port/Trunk
Service
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
2. Operator's
Parameter
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Custom
Service
Installation Manual
181
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Programming Menu Structure Diagram
Mailbox No
Entry
1. Enter/Edit
1. Program
1. Mailbox
Setting
1. Mailbox
Setting
2. Delete
2. Notification
Setting
3. Password Reset
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
4. Mailbox Listing
3. 3rd Device
2. Class of
Service
3. Remote Call
FWD to CO
COS No. (1-64)
Entry
1. Telephone No.1
2. Telephone No.2
1. Day Mode for each port
2. Night Mode for each port
1. Port Service
3. Lunch Mode for each port
4. Break Mode for each port
3. Port/Trunk
Service
1. Day Mode for each trunk group
2. Night Mode for each trunk group
2. Trunk Service
3. Lunch Mode for each trunk group
4. Break Mode for each trunk group
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
1. Operator 1
2. Operator's
Parameter
1. Day Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
2. Night Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
3. Lunch Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
4. Break Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Enter Extension
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Delete Extension
3. Extension Listing
2. Custom
Service
Custom Service No. (1-100) Entry
1. Enter
3. Caller ID
Call Routing
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
Continued Next Page
182
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
1. Enter
5. System
Parameter
Setting
1. System Group
Assignment
1. Mailbox
Group
2. Delete
3. Listing
1. Enter
2. Extension
Group
2. Delete
3. Listing
2. Time Service
1. Service Mode
1. Day Service
2. Time Service
2. Lunch Service
3. Break Service
3. Holiday Setting
1. Holiday Setting Enter
2. Holiday Setting Delete
4. Daylight Saving
Time
3. Holiday Listing
5. Prompt Setting
1. Enter
6. System Caller Name
Announcement
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
7. Others
6. Hardware
Setting
1. Extension Numbering Plan 1-16
2. Dialing Parameter
3. Message Waiting Notification
4. External Message Delivery
5. Call Hold
6. Rotary Telephone Service
7. Intercom Paging Parameters
8. Fax Management
9. Disconnect Parameter
1. RS-232C
2. Port Setting
for each port
3. PBX Interface
Parameter
1. Dialing
Parameter
2. Inband
Signaling
3. Digit Translation
Table
1. Inter-digit
Timeout
2. Input/Output
Installation Manual
183
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B2
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - MAILBOXES
Up to 30 Subscriber mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence of
steps.
To access the proper menu for mailbox setup, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 1 - Mailbox No.
Table 34
Parameter
Mailbox
Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the Subscriber's mailbox number. Mailbox
number length is determined during setup or when
initialising the system. Mailbox numbers cannot begin with
"0". If the length of the mailbox number has been defined
as 3 digits, for example, the valid range for all mailbox
numbers would be 100 through 997 (998 and 999 would be
reserved for the Message Manager and the System
Manager). The length of the mailbox number cannot be
changed through the Mailbox Setting screen once it has
been specified.
Editing Mailboxes
The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the Subscriber.
To access the proper menu for mailbox editing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 1 - Mailbox No. - 1
184
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 35
Parameter
The Extension
of the Owner
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a Subscriber's
mailbox.
Any valid extension number including an Extension Group
List number can be assigned.
Note: If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a
mailbox, all group members are able to share the
information stored there.
Owner's First
Name
Owner's Last
Name
Up to 16
alphabet
characters
(None)
The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed
on the Mailbox Assignments report.
The Dialling by Name feature uses the last name.
Class of Service COS No. 1-62 Used to define the set of services available to the
No.
(1)
Subscriber.
Note 1: We recommend that parameters for each COS
number be defined before assigning a Class of Service
(COS) number.
Note 2: COS No. 63 pertains to the Message Manager
while COS No. 64 pertains to the System Manager. These
numbers cannot be entered in the COS No. data field.
Covering
Extension
2-5 digits
(None)
Identifies the extension number that will receive
unanswered Subscriber calls. The Automated Attendant
Service accomplishes this call transfer. The caller is given
the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in
the Subscriber's mailbox.
The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call
Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled by
the Subscriber using the telephone keypad.
Note: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned as covering extensions.
Interview
Mailbox
Number
Installation Manual
2-5 digits
(None)
Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox. The
interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox
number.
185
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 35
Parameter
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
Value Range
(Default)
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Description/Function
If this parameter is set to "Yes," all calls routed to the
extension are automatically forwarded to the extension's
mailbox without ringing the telephone. Forwarding is
accomplished through the Automated Attendant service.
Callers are permitted to leave a message.
Note: When this feature has been set to "Yes", the mailbox
owner's extension does not necessarily need to exist as a
phone extension of the PBX.
Notification Setting
The parameters for the Message Waiting Notification - Device feature is set using this
procedure. A maximum of 3 destinations (Device 1, 2, 3) can be specified per mailbox.
• Class of Service programming determines if the Subscriber is able to use this feature.
• If the destination device is a telephone, the subscriber will be called when he has
message(s), and will have a chance to listen to the message(s).
• If the destination device is a beeper (pager), the subscriber will be notified when he has
message(s). If the beeper (pager) has a display, it is possible to send to it a callback
number. The callback number can be recorded when a caller leaves a message. If he
does not leave a callback number, the System Callback No., or the caller's number if it
is received through the telephone company's Caller ID service, will be sent instead.
To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 1 - Mailbox No. - 2 - Device No. 1, 2,
or 3.
186
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Notification Setting - Device 1-3
Table 36
Parameter
Dial Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 32 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
Assigns a telephone or beeper (pager) number to
Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the
dial number from his telephone.
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note: The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS and
"Type of Device" is set to "Beeper." The proper number
of "Pauses" must be inserted before the callback entry
code.
The Subscriber can also specify the dial number.
Type of Device 1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Use Mode
Specifies the device to be notified. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the
Dial Number (above). The Subscriber can also specify
the type of device from his telephone.
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
1. Not Use
Subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
2. Continuously
telephone.
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
1.Not Use - Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2.Continuously - Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever a
message is recorded in the mailbox.
3.Scheduled - Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
No. of Retries
0-9 times
(0)
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received
Busy Delay
Time
2-120 min
(3)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a busy condition is received before making a
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
Installation Manual
187
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 36
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
No Answer
Delay Time
2-120 min
(30)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a no-answer condition is received before making a
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
Time Frame 1,
2
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
a.m./p.m.
Specifies the daily schedule for Message Waiting
Notification service for all days of the week.
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
Note: These parameters are active only when "Use
Mode" is set to "Scheduled."
Remote Call Forward to CO
Follow the procedure below to specify the destination outside telephone number(s) to which
the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding feature is set to an outside (CO)
line.
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 can be specified per mailbox.
• Class of Service programming determines if the mailbox owner is able to use this
feature.
• This feature is only available with DPT Integration.
To access the proper menu for Remote Forward to CO, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 1 - Mailbox No. - 3 - Telephone
Number 1 or 2.
188
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 37
Parameter
Telephone
Number 1, 2
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16 digits
(None)
Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an
outside (CO) line.
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
" ".
The telephone number should begin with a Line Access
Code (to seize an outside [CO] line).
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Deleting a Mailbox
When a mailbox is deleted, the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox,
removes the mailbox from all group distribution lists, deletes the personal group distribution
lists assigned to the mailbox, erases the Subscriber's name, and cancels all external delivery
messages.
To access the proper menu for Deleting a Mailbox, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 2 - Mailbox No.
Resetting a Mailbox Password
The parameters for clearing a mailbox password are set using this procedure.
To access the proper menu for clearing a mailbox password, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 3 - Mailbox No.
Listing Mailboxes
The mailbox number list is displayed using this procedure.
Installation Manual
189
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
To display the list of all mailbox numbers, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 1 - 4
190
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B3
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
The COS-Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to mailbox
owners. A maximum of 64 (1-64) classes can be specified. A class of service number can be
assigned for each mailbox. More than 1 Subscriber can share the same class of service.
• COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is only
available to the System Manager.
• The procedure below determines the utilisation of the following special features on a
COS basis:
• Remote Call Forward to CO (available for COS numbers 1-63)
• Delete Message Confirmation (available for COS numbers 1-64)
• Message Waiting Notification (available for COS numbers 1-63)
• External Message Delivery (available for COS numbers 1-62)
• Auto Forwarding (available for COS numbers 1-62)
To access Class of Service Numbers 1-64, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 2 - COS No. (1-64)
Note
In Tables 38 and 39, sub-parameters are underlined. These sub-parameters can be assigned
only when the corresponding authorisation parameter is set to "Yes".
Installation Manual
191
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Class of Service Setting
COS Nos. 1-62 (for Subscribers)
To access Class of Service Numbers 1-62 for Subscribers, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 2 - COS No. (1-62)
Table 38
Parameter
Personal
Greeting
Length
Value Range
(Default)
8-60 s in 4 s
increments
(16)
Description/Function
Defines the maximum length of the personal greeting
message that can be recorded by the Subscriber.
This parameter applies to:
• Personal greeting on No Answer
• Personal greeting on Busy
• Personal greeting for After Hours
• Personal greeting for Caller ID
192
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
(14)
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message
will remain in the mailbox. The days are counted from
the day following the recording.
Saved Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(5)
Defines the number of days that a played message will
remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed"
whenever the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited"
is selected, the saved message will remain in the mailbox
until erased by the Subscriber.
Message
Length
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(3)
Defines the maximum message length.
If set to "0: Unlimited", a subscriber can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other
messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5-100 msgs
(10)
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in each mailbox.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 38
Parameter
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Message
Time
Message
Retrieval
Order
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
5-100 min
0: Unlimited
(10)
Specifies the total number of available minutes in each
mailbox for message storage (both new and saved
messages).
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies the order in which messages are retrieved
(played back for listening).
1. LIFO - Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
2. FIFO - Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest
message.
Message
1. Yes
Scanning with 2. No
Information
(No)
If set to "Yes," the VPS adds the message sender's
information, recording date, and time to the message
during message scan.
Play System
Prompt after
Personal
Greeting
If set to "Yes," directions for recording a message are
given to the caller directly after the personal greeting has
been played.
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
The following guidance messages are played:
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more
features."
"To pause and restart recording, press 2."
Use Call
Waiting
on Busy
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes," the VPS signals the busy extension that
another call is waiting.
Note: To use Call Waiting on Busy, you must also
enable the use of the Call Waiting feature at your PBX.
Installation Manual
193
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 38
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Message
1. Yes
Cancel for Live 2. No
Call Screening (Yes)
Description/Function
The Live Call Screening feature permits the Subscriber
to monitor incoming messages as they are being
recorded and speak to the caller if desired. If the
Subscriber chooses to speak to the caller, if not disabled
by the PBX beforehand, the VPS will record the twoway conversation. If set to "Yes," the VPS will
automatically delete this recording.
The two-way conversation may be saved in the mailbox
if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded. If set
to "No", the recording will be automatically saved.
Note: The Live Call Screening feature is available if
APT/DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA series or KX-TD series telephone
system.
Direct Mailbox 1. Yes
Access
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes," a Subscriber is able to directly enter the
Subscriber Service. This is accomplished by calling a
VPS extension directly from the Subscriber's extension.
The Subscriber Service Access Code ( + mailbox
number) should not be dialled. Password entry may be
required if specified beforehand.
Note: The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if
APT/DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA series or KX-TD series telephone
system.
Intercom
Paging Group
1-9
(COS NO.1-9
:Group 1-9
COS NO.10-62
: Group 1)
Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to
the Subscriber.
If set to "9," the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups .
Note: The Intercom Paging feature is available if APT/
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA series or KX-TD series telephone
system.
194
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 38
Parameter
Prompt Mode
Value Range
(Default)
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Description/Function
Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for
the Subscriber during a Message Waiting Notification
Call and Subscriber Service.
Note: If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode
but not recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory recorded System Prompts
in English. By default, User 1 and User 2 Prompts are not
recorded.
Remote Call
1. Yes
Forward to CO 2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; a subscriber can program (either from
a remote location or on-site) his extension to forward
various types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or
"Telephone No.2" (preprogrammed in the Mailbox
Setting), or to any other telephone number.
Note: The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available
if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system.
Delete
Message
Confirmation
Number of
CIDs for Caller
Name
Announcement
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
0 - 30
(30)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the
mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased
immediately.
Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which
Subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name
Announcement.
Personal
Greeting for
CID
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", Subscribers can utilise the personal
greeting feature for Caller ID.
Caller ID
Screening
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", Subscribers can utilise the Caller ID
Screening feature.
Installation Manual
195
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 38
Parameter
Authorisation
for Message
Notification
Value Range
(Default)
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Description/Function
If set to "Yes," Subscribers are able to utilise the
Message Waiting Notification feature. The subparameters to be set include Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode, MWL Notification for Unreceived Message, and
Device Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to
"No", sub-parameters cannot be assigned.
Note: This parameter in COS No. 1 is set to "Yes" when
the Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber
mailboxes.
Beeper
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits Subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Caller
Select:
After recording a message, callers are asked
if they would like to enter a callback
number.
Without:
Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before:
Before recording a message, the system
asks the caller to enter the callback number.
After:
After recording a message, the system asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
Disable:
Disables the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Note: To utilise this feature, the callback number entry
code must be included in the Subscriber's beeper (pager)
number. When "Disable" is selected or if the caller does
not enter a callback number, "System Callback No." (See
Table 61) will be displayed on the beeper's (pager's)
display. If a caller's number is received through the
telephone company's Caller ID service, the caller's
number will be displayed instead of "System Callback
No."
MWL
1. Yes
Notification for 2. No
(Yes)
Unreceived
Message
196
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp will illuminate
when unplayed messages remain after the subscriber has
accessed the mailbox for Subscriber Service.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 38
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Device
1. Yes
Notification for 2. No
(No)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are
received.
Authorisation
for External
Message
Delivery
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the External
Message Delivery feature. The sub-parameter to be set is
Prompt Mode. If set to "No", sub-parameter cannot be
assigned.
Prompt Mode
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will
be greeted by the VPS in the specified language
(prompt). However, if "Selective" is enabled, then the
receiver has a choice of prompts. See related explanation
in "Incoming Call Service Prompt" in Table 21 in
5.3.1 Port Service Menu.
Note: When "Selective" is enabled and the receiver uses
a rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified by
"Prompt for Rotary Callers" in Table 21 in 5.3.1 Port
Service Menu.
Authorisation
for Auto
Forwarding
Mailbox
Number
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
2-5 digits
(None)
If set to "Yes", the VPS automatically forwards
messages that have not been accessed for a specific
length of time to another mailbox. The sub-parameters to
be set for this feature include Mailbox Number, Delay
Time, and Forwarding Mode. If set to "No", subparameters cannot be assigned.
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be
forwarded.
Note: The numbers of the System Group Distribution
List cannot be specified as the destination.
Delay Time
(h) (min)
00:05 to 99:59
(00:30)
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the
VPS must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note: The delay time must be less than the New Message
Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before
being forwarded.
Installation Manual
197
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 38
Parameter
Forwarding
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the
original mailbox. When set to "Copy," a copy of the
message is retained in the original mailbox after
forwarding. When set to "Move," messages are
forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained
at the original location.
1. Copy
2. Move
(Move)
COS Nos. 63 & 64 (for Managers)
To access Class of Service Numbers 63 & 64 for Managers, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 2 - COS No. (63-64)
Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64. COS number
64 cannot assign the parameters relating to the Message Waiting Notification and the Remote
Call Forward to CO features.
Table 39
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
(30)
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can
remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the day
after massage reception.
Saved Message
1-30 days
Defines the number of days a played saved message can
Retention Time 0: Unlimited remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed" whenever
(30)
the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited" is selected,
saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by
the mailbox owner.
Message
Length
198
1-6 min
Defines the maximum message length.
0: Unlimited
(6)
If set to "0: Unlimited", a manager can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other messages
will automatically be set to 6 min.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 39
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5-100 msgs
(100)
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Message Time
5-100 min Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing
0: Unlimited (both new and saved) messages in each mailbox.
(100)
Message
1. LIFO
Retrieval Order 2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved
(played back for listening).
1. LIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
2. FIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest.
Message
1. Yes
Scanning with 2. No
Information
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender's name and
the recording date and time to the message during the
message scan.
Prompt mode
Specifies the language used for voice prompts.
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Remote Call
1. Yes
Forward to CO 2. No
(No)
Note: If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but
not recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory recorded System Prompts in
English. By default, User 1 and User 2 Prompts are not
recorded.
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; the Message Manager can program
(either from a remote location or on-site) his extension to
forward various types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or
"Telephone No.2" (pre-programmed in the Mailbox
Setting), or to any other telephone number.
Note: The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic
KX-TD series telephone system.
Delete
Message
Confirmation
Installation Manual
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
If set to "No", the message is erased immediately.
199
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 39
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Authorisation
for Message
Notification
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
When set to "Yes," the Message Manager is able to utilise
the Message Waiting Notification feature. The subparameters to be set include Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode, MWL Notification for Unreceived Message, and
Device Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to
"NO", sub-parameters cannot be assigned.
Beeper
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
1. Caller
Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits the Message Manager to use the Callback Number
Entry feature.
Caller
Select:
After recording a message, the caller is asked
if the message is urgent. If urgent, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Without:
Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before:
Before recording a message, the system asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
After:
After recording a message, the system asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
Disable:
Disables the Callback Number Entry feature.
Note: To utilise this feature, the callback number entry code
must be included in the Subscriber's beeper (pager) number.
When "Disable" is selected or if the caller does not enter a
callback number, "System Callback No." (See Table 61)
will be displayed on the beeper's (pager's) display. If a
caller's number is received through a telephone company's
Caller ID service, the caller's number will be displayed
instead of "System Callback No."
200
MWL
1. Yes
Notification for 2. No
(Yes)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp illuminates when
unplayed messages remain after the Message Manager has
accessed the mailbox.
Device
1. Yes
Notification for 2. No
(No)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are received.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B4
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - PORT/TRUNK
SERVICE
One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX trunk group:
Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service.
The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the Company Greeting
Number, Prompt Mode, and Delayed Answer Time to be programmed.
Services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service has the highest priority.)
To access the Port/Trunk Service Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3
B4.1
Port Assignment
To select the Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 -1 - Port No. (1-2)
Port 1 - Day Mode
To select the Day Mode Features for Port 1, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 -1 - Port No. (1) - 1
Installation Manual
201
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 40
Parameter
Company
Greeting No.
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Incoming Call 1. Voice Mail
Service
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
Note 1: When you specify the Interview Service, one of
4. Custom
Subscriber's Interview mailbox numbers should also be
(Auto. Attn.)
specified.
Note 2: When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be specified.
Incoming Call 1. System
Service Prompt 2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port.
Note 1: This parameter is not valid if incoming call
service is set to "Interview" or "Custom".
Note 2: If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select
a prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
1. System
Rotary Callers 2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies in which language rotary callers hear the voice
prompts when they cannot enter any digit to select a
"Prompt Selection Number" while the Multilingual
selection menu message is being played.
Delayed
Answer
Time
Specifies whether the port answers immediately (0) or
with a delay (1 - 15 s).
0-15 s
(0)
Port 1 - Night Mode
To select the Night Mode Features for port 1, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 - 1 - Port No. (1) - 2
202
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Port 1 - Lunch Mode
To select the Lunch Mode Features for port 1, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 - 1 - Port No. (1) - 3
Port 1 - Break Mode
To select the Break Mode Features for port 1, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 - 1 - Port No. (1) - 4
Note
The port assignment procedure for Port 2 is the same as Port 1.
B4.2
Trunk Group Assignment
This assignment is effective only with APT/DPT Integration.
To select the Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected PBX trunk group,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 -2 - Trunk Group No. (1-24)
Trunk 1 - Day Mode
To select the Day Mode Features for PBX trunk group 1, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 -2 - Trunk Group No. (1) - 1
Installation Manual
203
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 41
Parameter
Company
Greeting No.
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the trunk
(outside line) group.
Incoming Call 1. Voice Mail
Service
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
5. None
(None)
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Note 1: When you specify the Interview Service, one of
Subscriber's Interview mailbox numbers should also be
specified.
Note 2: When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be specified.
Incoming Call 1. System
Service Prompt 2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this trunk group.
Note 1: This parameter is not valid if incoming call
service is set to "Interview" or "Custom".
Note 2: If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select
a prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
1. System
Rotary Callers 2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies in which language rotary callers hear the voice
prompts when they cannot enter any digit to select a
"Prompt Selection Number" while the Multilingual
selection menu message is being played.
Delayed
Answer
Time
Specifies whether the trunk group answers immediately
(0) or with a delay (1 - 15 s).
0-15 s
(0)
Trunk 1 - Night Mode
To select the Night Mode Features for PBX trunk group 1, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 - 2 - Trunk Group No. (1) - 2
204
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Trunk 1 - Lunch Mode
To select the Lunch Mode Features for PBX trunk group 1, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 - 2 - Trunk Group No. (1) - 3
Trunk 1 - Break Mode
To select the Break Mode Features for PBX trunk group 1, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 3 - 2 - Trunk Group No. (1) - 4
Notes
The trunk group assignment procedure for Trunks 2-24 is the same as Trunk 1.
For KX-TA series and KX-TD series, "trunk group number" in this section (assignment)
means "exchange line number".
Installation Manual
205
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B5
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SERVICE
SETTINGS
B5.1
Automated Attendant Parameters
The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions: Department or Speed Dialling,
Operator's Parameters, and Alternate Extension.
To select the Automated Attendant Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4- 1
Department Dialing
Department Dialling is a speed-dialling feature that permits a caller to reach the intended
extension by dialling a single digit (1 - 9).
To select Department Dialing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 1
Table 42
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Department
Dialing No. 1-9
2-5 digits
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies the department extension number.
Note 1: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
Note 2: The Message Manager must record the
Department Dialling menu.
Operator's Parameters
Used to specify the operator's (operator 1, 2, 3) extensions and mailboxes and how operatorseeking calls are treated.
Operator's parameters can be individually set for Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
206
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
To select Operator's Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 2
Operator's Parameters - Day Mode - Operator 1
This parameter is used to enable or disable the Operator Service. It specifies Operator 1's
extension and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension. The assigned extension
number for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager. When Operator
service is enabled, operator-seeking calls are first transferred to Operator 1's extension.
Notes
• Because the extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is for the
Message Manager, you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox.
• By default, the extension number for the Message Manager's extension (assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be used with
the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding
Set feature. When using these features, You must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
To select Operator Parameters - Day Mode - Operator 1, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 2 - 1 - 1
Table 43
Parameter
Operator
Service
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Description/Function
Used to turn the Operator Service feature on or off.
Note: All non-touchtone-input calls in Automated
Attendant Service are transferred to the General Delivery
Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled.
207
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 43
Parameter
Operator's
Extension
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Used to select the extension number for Operator 1.
1-5 digits
(0 (for KX-TA
series) or 9 (for
Note 1: The default setting "0" (for KX-TA series) or "9"
KX-TD series))
(for KX-TD series) cannot be used with the Message
Waiting Notification - Lamp feature. An extension
number must be assigned that is included in the Extension
Numbering Plan.
Note 2: The extension number must be an unassigned one.
Operator's
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(998)
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in
this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or
No Answer Coverage modes are set.
Operator No
Answer Time
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered within
the time set, the VPS will offer other options as defined by
the "No Answer Coverage Mode."
Note: This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
Busy Coverage 1. Hold
Mode
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
208
Specifies how calls are handled when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
1. Hold - The caller is automatically placed on hold and
the Operator 1 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage - The caller is offered one of the
options specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode.
3. Call Waiting - Operator 1 is signaled when a call is
waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message - The VPS disconnects the call
after playing "Thank you for calling."
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 43
Parameter
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
Message
Repeat Cycle
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how Operator 1 calls are handled when not
answered within the time period set through the "Operator
No Answer Time" mode.
1-3 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times that the system will play the
Automated Attendant top menu.
1. Caller Select - This selection allows the caller to leave
a message or call another extension.
2. Leave Message - The caller is instructed to leave a
message in Operator 1's mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message - The caller is disconnected after
playing "Thank you for calling."
4. Next Operator - The system transfers the call to
Operator 2.
Note
Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator call coverage settings
depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS. Even if the operator call coverage
parameters are set to "Next Operator" on Busy/ No Answer, the call may go to the VPS (if
the Operator has set the call forwarding to the VPS).
Operator's Parameters - Day Mode - Operator 2
Operator-seeking calls are received at Operator 2 when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer
and Operator 1's parameters are set as follows.
• Busy Coverage Mode - No Answer Coverage
• No Answer Coverage Mode - Next Operator
To select Operator Parameters - Day Mode - Operator 2, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 2 - 1 - 2
Installation Manual
209
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 44
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator's
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Used to select the extension number for Operator 2. Any
valid extension number can be assigned.
Operator's
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Used to specify the mailbox number for Operator 2.
Callers to Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in
this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or
No Answer Coverage modes are set.
Busy Coverage 1. Hold
Mode
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how calls are handled when the Operator 2
extension is busy.
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
Specifies how Operator 2 calls are handled when not
answered within the time period set through the
"Operator No Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
1. Hold - The caller is automatically placed on hold and
the Operator 2 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage - The caller is offered one of the
options specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode.
3. Call Waiting - Operator 2 is signaled when a call is
waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message - The VPS disconnects the call
after playing "Thank you for calling."
1. Caller Select - This selection allows the caller to leave
a message or call another extension.
2. Leave Message - The caller is instructed to leave a
message in Operator 2's mailbox.
3. Disconnect message - The caller is disconnected after
playing "Thank you for calling."
4. Next Operator - The system transfers the call to
Operator 3.
Operator's Parameters - Day Mode - Operator 3
Operator-seeking calls to Operator 3, when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and Operator 2's
parameters are set as follows.
• Busy Coverage Mode - No Answer Coverage
• No Answer Coverage Mode - next Operator
210
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
To select Operator Parameters - Day Mode - Operator 3, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 2 - 1 - 3
Table 45
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator's
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Used to select the extension number for Operator 3. Any
valid extension number can be assigned.
Operator's
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Used to specify the mailbox number for Operator 3.
Callers to Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in
this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or
No Answer Coverage modes are set.
Busy Coverage 1. Hold
Mode
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how calls are handled when the Operator 3
extension is busy.
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
Specifies how Operator 3 calls are handled when not
answered within the time period set through the
"Operator No Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
(Caller Select)
1. Hold - The caller is automatically placed on hold and
the Operator 3 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage - The caller is offered one of the
options specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode.
3. Call Waiting - Operator 3 is signaled when a call is
waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message - The VPS disconnects the call
after playing "Thank you for calling."
1. Caller Select - This selection allows the caller to leave
a message or call another extension.
2. Leave Message - The caller is instructed to leave a
message in Operator 3's mailbox.
3. Disconnect message - The caller is disconnected after
playing "Thank you for calling."
Notes
An operator-seeking call is always first transferred to Operator 1. The call is then
transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 respectively, depending on system programming.
Installation Manual
211
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
"Next Operator" cannot be set for "No Answer Coverage Mode" of Operator 3.
Operator's Parameters - Night Mode - Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator's Parameters - Lunch Mode - Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator's Parameters - Break Mode - Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Alternate Extension Assignment
Used to assign extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension
transfer sequence. Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the
sequence defined by "Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence" (See "Alternate Extension
Transfer Sequence" in Table 73 in B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters).
To select the Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 3
Alternate Extension Group - Enter
The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence.
To select the Alternate Extension - Enter Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 3 - 1
212
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 46
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Alternate
Extension
(1-32)
2-5 digits
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies an extension, which requires a different
transfer sequence than normal.
Note: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
Alternate Extension - Delete
The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group.
To select the Alternate Extension - Delete Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 3 - 2
Alternate Extension - Listing
Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group.
To select the Alternate Extension - Listing Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 3 - 3
B5.2
Custom Service
Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services. By assigning a function to each key, a
customised key operation service can be provided to callers. A maximum of 100 custom
services can be established up to 8 layers deep.
To select the Custom Service Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 2 - Custom Service No. (1-100)
Installation Manual
213
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 47
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description
Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt Mode
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies the language of the Custom Sevice and all
subsequent prompts.
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu
messages are repeated to the caller.
Call Transfer
Anytime
Extn./Mbx/No
(Extn.)
Specifies the destination to which the call is transferred.
The "Extn." setting (enter "E") enables callers to be
transferred directly to their intended party by dialling
the extension number. The "Mbx" setting (enter "M")
enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by
entering the mailbox number. The "No" setting (enter
"N") disables extension transfer and mailbox transfer;
only 1-digit entries work (following the Custom
Service menu).
Wait for
Second Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Resolves the problem when the first digit of the
extension or mailbox number is the same as one of the
Custom Service menu choices. The VPS waits the
specified period of time for a second digit to be dialled.
If the time period expires without a second digit being
entered, the system assumes the caller has selected a
menu choice. This parameter is used only if "Call
Transfer Anytime" is set to "Ext" or "Mbx."
a-f
(c)
*
See Keypad
Assignment on the
next page.
Specifies how a call is treated when there is no response
to the menu message. No response usually indicates
that the caller is using a rotary phone. The factory
setting is "C. Operator", which allows the caller to be
automatically connected to an operator after message
playback.
No DTMF
Input
Operation
214
Note: This parameter overrides "Incoming Call Service
Prompt."
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 47
Parameter
Keypad
Assignment
0-9, , #
Value Range
(Default)
a-n
( : d, 0: c
Others: None)
Description/Function
Any of the 14 services listed below (a-n) can be
assigned to the 0 through 9, and # keys on the
telephone keypad. Callers are able to access these
services by pressing the corresponding keys on their
telephones.
(a) Transfer to Mailbox - Allows the caller to leave
messages in a specific mailbox. Enter "a"
followed by a mailbox number.
(b) Transfer to Extension - Transfers the caller to a
specific extension. Enter "b" followed by an
extension number.
(c) Operator - Connects the caller to the operator.
(d) Exit - Plays a final guidance message and
disconnects. The message must be recorded by the
Message Manager.
(e) Previous Menu - If programmed, allows the caller
access to a previous Custom Service Menu.
(f) Custom Service - If programmed, allows the caller
access to another Custom Service.
(g) Voice Mail Service - Allows the caller access to
the Voice Mail Service.
(h) Call Transfer Service - Allows the caller access to
the Automated Attendant Service.
(i) Subscriber Service - Allows the caller access to
Subscriber Service. Available only when calls are
from subscribers.
(j) Department Dialling - Transfers the caller to the
Department Dialling menu.
(k) Dial by Name - Lets the caller be transferred to an
extension by dialling the first 3 or 4 letters of the
extension owner's last name.
(l) Repeat Menu - Repeats the Custom Service menu
message.
(m) Main Menu - Lets the caller return directly to the
top Custom Service menu.
(n) FAX Transfer - Enables the caller to send a fax
message to the appropriate extension where a fax
machine is connected.
Installation Manual
215
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B5.3
Caller ID Call Routing Parameters
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired
destination. Calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers are automatically forwarded to a
programmed extension, mailbox (System Group Distribution List included) or Custom
Service. "Private" (caller's number is not received) and "Out of Area" calls can also be
forwarded automatically to a desired extension, mailbox or Custom Service.
The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature.
Services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service has the highest priority.)
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 3
Caller ID Call Routing - Enter
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing - Enter, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 3 - 1 - Caller ID List No. (1-120)
Table 48
216
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Caller ID No.
P, O or
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0,
(None)
Description/Function
Assigns the telephone number which the VPS
automatically forwards to a desired destination. " "
substitutes any number (= wild card).
To have a "Private" call automatically forwarded to a
desired destination, enter "P".
For an "Out of Area" call, enter "O".
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 48
Parameter
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Up to 20
characters
(None)
Description/Function
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
number. Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Note: When nothing is registered in this parameter but
the caller's name is transmitted from the Local Exchange,
the name will be automatically registered in this
parameter. When this is done, an asterisk " " will appear
with the Call Transfer parameter if "PUTD" is enabled
(see 7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD)).
For example, you might see this: "Custom 3 ". This
indicates the name was automatically registered in the
VPS.
Call Transfer
Custom/Extn./
Mbx
(None)
Specifies the destination to which the call from an
assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded.
The "Custom" setting (enter"C") enables callers to be
forwarded to the specified Custom Service menu. The
"Extn." setting (enter "E") enables callers to be forwarded
to the specified extension. The "Mbx" setting (enter "M")
enables callers to leave messages in the specified
mailbox. A System Group Distribution List number can
be specified here instead of a mailbox number.
Caller ID Call Routing - Delete
Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list.
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing - Delete, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 3 - 2 - Caller ID List No. (1-120)
Caller ID Call Routing - Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing - Listing, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 3 -3
Installation Manual
217
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B6
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SYSTEM
PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.1
System Group Assignment
To access the proper menu for System Group Assignment, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1
System Group Assignment - Mailbox Group
This parameter allows a Subscriber to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes.
These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The
VPS is able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists. Each list can have up to 20
destination mailbox numbers. Mailboxes can be added or deleted from these lists and reviewed
as needed.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 1
Mailbox Group - Enter
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group – Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 1 - 1 - Group List No.
Table 49
Parameter
Group
List No.
218
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant mailbox number. The Subscriber
can specify that the VPS transfer or deliver messages to
all members of a group by simply specifying the System
Group Distribution List No.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 49
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
(None)
Allows a group name to be specified. If a group name is
not required, press RETURN, and specify the mailbox
numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [ (space)] can be used.
Member
1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group.
Mailbox Group - Delete
Permits specified mailboxes to be deleted from the list.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group - Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 1 - 2 - Group List No.
Mailbox Group - Listing
Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group - Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 1 - 3
System Group Assignment - Extension Group
Several extensions can be assembled into a single list. The VPS is able to maintain up to 20
Extension Group Lists. Each list can support up to 20 extensions. Extensions can be added,
deleted, and reviewed. Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox and be notified
by the Message Waiting Notification - Lamp feature (if authorised) when a message is present.
Installation Manual
219
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Extension Group - Enter
To access the proper menu for Extension Group - Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 2 - 1 - Group List No.
Table 50
Parameter
Group List
No.
Value Range
(Default)
2-5 digits
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies any vacant extension number.
Note: The Extension Group List number can be assigned
as "The Extension of the Owner" of a mailbox. This
permits all group members to share the information in the
mailbox.
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
(None)
Allows a group name to be specified. If a group name is
not required, press RETURN, and specify the mailbox
numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [ (space)] can be used.
Member
1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number belonging to the group.
Note: Members cannot have a personal mailbox.
Extension Group - Delete
Permits specified extensions to be deleted from the list.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group - Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 2 - 2 - Group List No.
Extension Group - Listing
This parameter displays all Extension Group List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group List Numbers, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 1 - 2 - 3
220
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B6.2
Time Service
To access the proper menu for Time Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2
Time Service-Service Mode
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day/Night, Lunch, and Break Services); however, the System Administrator
or the System Manager can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific
Service Mode.
To access the proper menu for Time Service-Service Mode for the selected time
group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-1
Installation Manual
221
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 51
Parameter
Service
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
1. Automatic
Mode
2. Manual Day
Mode
3. Manual
Night Mode
4. Manual
Lunch Mode
5. Manual
Break Mode
6. PBX Control
Mode
(Automatic
Mode)
Description/Function
Assigns a specific Service Mode. There are 6 options
available:
1. Automatic Mode—Operates according to the setting in
the Time Service.
2. Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day Mode.
3. Manual Night Mode—Operates only in Night Mode.
4. Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in Lunch Mode.
5. Manual Break Mode—Operates only in Break Mode.
6. PBX Control Mode—Operation changes depending
on PBX time period.
Note: Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is
retained unless the System Manager or System
Administrator changes it again, even after the power is
cut and restored.
PBX Control Mode is available only if APT/DPT
Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX-TA series or
KX-TD series telephone system. If PBX Control Mode
does not function after it has been selected, the VPS will
operate in Automatic Mode.
In Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday service has the highest priority.)
In Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), services have this order of priority:
Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service is disregarded.)
Time Service-Time Service
Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time
of day: Day, Night, Lunch and Break Services are available.
Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters; Night Service starts when Day
Service ends, and ends when Day Service starts. There are 3 periods for Break Service: Break
1 Service, Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service.
In each Time Service period, the parameters for Port Service, Trunk Group Service and
Operator's Parameters can be specified differently.
222
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Note
Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service period. If
Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period, for example, Break 3 Service does not work.
To access the proper menu for Time Service-Time Service, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2
Time Service-Day Service
To access the proper menu for Day Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-1
Table 52
Parameter
Mon
(Start/End)
|
Sun
(Start/End)
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Day Service.
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m. Day Mode: Day Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
Night Mode: Night Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
(9:00 AM-5:00
PM)
Time Service-Lunch Service
To access the proper menu for Lunch Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-2
Installation Manual
223
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 53
Parameter
Mon
(Start/End)
|
Sun
(Start/End)
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Lunch
Service.
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
(None)
Time Service-Break Service
To access the proper menu for Break Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-3
Table 54
Parameter
Mon
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
|
Sun
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
224
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Break
Service.
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
Note: When Break Service periods overlap Lunch
(None)
Service period, Lunch Service has priority.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B6.3
Holiday Setting
A special service mode can be programmed for up to 20 holidays. When the day(s) is set as
holiday(s), settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service, Port Service
and Caller ID Call Routing.
When setting specific day(s) as holiday(s), you have the following 2 options:
• The first option is to specify a single day on which to enable the Holiday Service setting.
For example, you can specify New Year's Day as a holiday.
• The second option is to specify a range of days to enable the Holiday Service setting on
all days within the specified range. For example, you can specify the start and the end
dates of your Christmas holiday.
Note
Holidays cannot overlap. For example, if you have set Dec. 22nd to Jan. 6th as holidays, you
cannot set Jan. 1st as a holiday.
To provide a special message to callers on a holiday (for example, "Today is New Year's Day
and our office is closed. If you wish to record a message, please press 1 now."), you can create
a Custom Service menu. Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan. 1st. Use
foreign languages where appropriate.
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 3
Holiday Setting - Enter
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting - Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 3 - 1 - Holiday No. (1-20)
Table 55
Parameter
Name of
Holiday
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16 characters For reference. Any alphanumeric character, and
(None)
[(space)], [-], [.] and ['] can be used.
225
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 55
Parameter
Date
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
DD/MM-DD/MM Specifies the day or the range of days on which to
enable Holiday Service setting.
or
DD/MM
(DD: Day
• If you want to set a single day as a holiday, specify
MM: Month)
only one date.
(None)
• If you want to set a range of days as holidays,
specify both the start and the end dates of the range.
Note: Holidays cannot overlap.
Retain Holiday 1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Stores the Holiday Service setting for future use. If set
to "Yes", the same setting will be activated
automatically on the same day every year. If set to
"No", the setting will be cancelled automatically after
the holiday is over.
Service
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the
holiday.
1-32
S: System Greeting
N: None
(S: System
Greeting)
Specifies the Company Greeting to be played on the
holiday.
Company
Greeting No.
Port Affected
Port No.
(1-2)
Note: When Interview Service is specified, one of
Subscriber's Interview Mailbox numbers should also
be specified. When the Custom Service is specified,
one of the Custom Service numbers (1-100) should
also be specified.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
(However, the Message Manager can change this.)
Specifies the port number on which the Holiday
Service setting is activated. The unspecified ports
provide the usual incoming call service.
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Trunk Affected
Trunk No.
(1-24)
Specifies the trunk (outside line) number on which the
Holiday Service setting is activated. The unspecified
trunks (outside lines) provide the usual incoming call
service.
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
226
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Holiday Setting - Delete
Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number (1-20).
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting - Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 3 - 2
Holiday Setting - Listing
Used to display all of the specified holiday names and dates.
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting - Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 3 - 3
Installation Manual
227
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B6.4
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Used to adjust the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving
time.
To access the proper menu for Daylight Saving Time, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 4
Table 56
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Start Date/ End
Date
DD: Day
MM: Month
(None)
Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight
saving time. The VPS advances 1 h on the starting date
of daylight saving time, and restores the time on the
ending date. Both the starting date and the ending date
must be set. The same date cannot be used for both
settings.
Note: The VPS changes to and from DST at 2:00 AM.
Warning: Time Synchronisation (see 7.2.4 Set
Time (TIME)) overrides the DST setting of the VPS.
B6.5
Prompt Setting
This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
To access the proper menu for Prompt Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 5
228
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 57
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
System Prompt
Selection
Number
1-9
(None)
Assigns a selection number (1-9) to each prompt. Callers
use the numbers to select the desired language for their
message prompts. This setting is required when either one
or both of the following parameters are set to "Selective."
User 1 Prompt
Selection
Number
Port Assignment - Incoming Call Service Prompt
authorisation of External Message Delivery - Prompt
Mode
User 2 Prompt
Selection
Number
Example:
For service in English, press (7).
For service in Spanish, press (8).
For service in Chinese, press (9).
The Message manager is able to record this Multilingual
Selection Menu.
Note: The Prompt Selection Number and the first digit of
the mailbox number should be different from each other.
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp
for User 1
Prompt
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp
for User 2
Prompt
1. Before
2. After
3. 24-h
(After)
This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or
User 2 Prompts are in use. This parameter specifies the
following:
1. Before - the VPS announces "AM/PM" before the time
(e.g., P.M. 3:42).
2. After - The VPS announces "AM/PM" after the time
(e.g., 3:42 P.M.).
3. 24-h - the VPS announces the time in 24-h format (e.g.,
15:42).
Note: When System Prompts are in use, the parameter is
set to "After".
B6.6
System Caller Name Announcement
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce pre-recorded Caller ID caller names
when extension users listen to messages left in their mailbox from the assigned Caller IDs.
Extension users can also hear caller names when calls from the assigned Caller IDs are
Installation Manual
229
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
transferred to them from the VPS (Caller ID Screening). The recorded caller names will also
be heard when the callers use the Intercom Paging features. The recorded names will be added
to the end of the page.
The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS (Class of Service) settings.
This feature is also enabled by selecting "Call Screening" in 4.1 Call Transfer Status in the
Subscriber's Guide.
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" in 4.1 Call Transfer
Status, and/or in 4.3 Incomplete Call Handling in the Subscriber's Guide.
System Caller Names are recorded by the Message Manager.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 6
System Caller Name Announcement - Enter
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement — Enter, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 6 - 1 - Caller ID List No. (1-120)
Table 58
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Caller ID No.
Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9, 0 announces a pre-recorded caller name to extension
users.
(None)
Description
Up to 20 characters Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
(None)
number. Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
System Caller Name Announcement - Delete
Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement — Delete, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 6 - 2 - Caller ID List No. (1-120)
230
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
System Caller Name Announcement - Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement — Listing, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 6 - 3
B6.7
Other Parameters
To access the proper menu for Other Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7
Other Parameters - Extension Numbering Plan
Used to specify the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognise the
dialled extension as valid. This setting promotes the call handling of the Automated Attendant
Service. This setting is recommended for better integration with the PBX.
To access the proper menu for Extension Numbering Plan, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 1
Installation Manual
231
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 59
Parameter
Numbering
Plan
1-16
Value Range
(Default)
2-5 digits
consisting
of 0-9, X
(Numbering
Plan
1:2 XX
Numbering Plan
2:3 XX
Numbering Plan
3-16: None)
Description/Function
Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension
numbers. Up to 16 entries can be added to the list. Each
entry can contain 2-5 digits of numeric characters, "0-9",
and "X" which matches any digit. Extension numbers
cannot begin with "0."
Examples:
a) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 201
through 264 and 301 through 364, specify the numbers
as follows:
2XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "2."
3XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "3."
b) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400
through 450 and 3300 through 3399, specify the
numbers as follows:
4XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "4."
33XX: Indicates any 4-digit extension starting with
"33."
Note:
Auto Configuration will set this parameter automatically.
The Automated Attendant will dial any 2-5 digit PBX
extension number (except numbers beginning with "0")
whether valid or not. If the dialled number is included in the
numbering plan, the Automated Attendant will
immediately send it to the PBX without waiting for further
input. If not included in the plan, the Automated Attendant
will wait until the dialled number is recognised as an
extension number, the internal inter-digit timer expires, or
the caller dials 5 digits.
If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the
Numbering Plan, the VPS will consider it an outside
number. The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the
"Outgoing Call Setup Sequence."
232
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Other Parameters - Dialing Parameter
To select Dialing Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 2
Table 60
Parameter
Number of
Digits
to Access
Outside Line
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
0-8 digits
(1)
Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an
exchange line.
Example:
If the PBX requires callers to dial "0" to access an
exchange line, this parameter should be set as "1." This
enables the system to recognise that an outgoing call
setup sequence is completed once the initial "0" has
been dialled (0-123-4567). The full sequence is
therefore: 0 - (outgoing call setup sequence) - 1234567.
The VPS can discriminate between local and long
distance calls and can report outgoing calls and calling
times for billing purposes on periodic port usage
reports.
Call Transfer
No Answer
Time
10-60 s
(20)
Specifies the amount of time that the VPS must wait
before retrieving the transferred call when there is no
answer at the destination extension.
Outgoing Call
No Answer
Time
10-90 s
(30)
Specifies the amount of time that the VPS must wait
before concluding that there is no answer at the outside
number called.
Pause Time
Installation Manual
1-9 s
(2)
Specifies the pause time between dialled digits.
233
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 60
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Outgoing Call
Setup
Sequence
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, , #, F, R, S, T,
W
(T)
Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS when
calling an exchange line. Up to 12 digits can be set.
The default value is "T." "T" indicates that the system
will dial the outside phone number only after detecting
a dial tone.
Example:
0W = (0) - 1 s wait - dial outside phone number. "0" is
the exchange line access number.
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Other Parameters - Message Waiting Notification
The following parameters are used to control the handling of message waiting notification
calls.
To select the Message Waiting Notification Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 3
Table 61
234
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1, 2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Device feature. The VPS makes outgoing
calls using the port specified in this field. At least 1 port
must be specified.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 61
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Message
Waiting Lamp
Ports
Port No.
(1, 2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Lamp feature.
The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the
extension using the port specified in this field. At least 1
port must be specified.
Message
Waiting Lamp
for Every
Message
1. No
2. Yes
(Yes)
When set to "Yes," the VPS will turn on the Message
Waiting Lamp of the extension each time a new message
is recorded in the mailbox. This will occur even if the
Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a
previous message. This setting is useful when the first
attempt is unsuccessful.
When set to "No," the VPS will turn on the Message
Waiting Lamp for the first message only. The VPS will
not turn on the lamp for subsequent messages until the
Subscriber has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages
stored there.
Max. Digits for
Callback No.
1-48 digits
(20)
Specifies the maximum number of digits the caller can
enter as a callback number. This number will be
displayed on beepers (pagers) if the "Beeper Callback
No. Entry Mode" is enabled.
Callback No.
Entry Interdigit
Time-Out
1-10 s
(5)
Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on
Beeper Callback No. Entry. If the caller does not enter
any digits within the specified time, the VPS will not
accept entry of any additional digits.
Up to 32 digits
(None)
Specifies a telephone number displayed on the
Subscriber's beeper (pager) as a callback number when
"Type" is set to "Beeper."
System
Callback No.
Note: If "Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode" is enabled
through COS, the callback number entered by the caller
will be displayed on the destination beeper (pager)
instead of the System Callback No. However, if the caller
fails to enter a callback number, the System Callback No.
will be displayed.
Installation Manual
235
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Other Parameters - External Message Delivery
Used to control the handling of External Message Delivery calls.
To select the External Message Delivery, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 4
Table 62
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Retry Times
0-9 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times that an external message
delivery call should be attempted when the destination is
busy or if there is no answer.
Busy Delay
2-60 min
(3)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait
after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver
the message again.
No Answer
Delay
2-120 min
(60)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait
after a no answer condition is received before trying to
deliver the message again.
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1, 2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message
Delivery feature.
Message
Length
1-6 min
(3)
Specifies the allowable message length of external
delivery messages that the Subscriber can record.
Max. Messages
for Mailboxes
1-100 msgs
(3)
System
External
Message
Delivery
Duration Time
1-9 min
(3)
Callback
Telephone No.
236
Specifies the maximum number of external delivery
messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox.
Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowable
for an external message delivery call. Used to prevent
excessive telephone charges. Time begins when the
destination number answers the call. The VPS terminates
the call when the specified length of time has been
exceeded. However, the VPS does not terminate a call
until the whole message is played even though the
specified time expires.
Up to 32 digits This telephone number is announced to the recipient as the
(None)
telephone number to be called in order to retrieve the
sender's message. The VPS plays the callback telephone
number to recipients if unable to deliver the message
because of incorrect password entry.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Other Parameters - Call Hold
To select Call Hold, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 5
Table 63
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Call Hold
Mode
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
If set to "Enable", the VPS gives callers the option of
either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of
several Incomplete Call Handling service options.
While on hold, the VPS periodically gives callers the
choice to either continue to hold or select one of the
Incomplete Call Handling service options.
If set to "Disable," the VPS immediately offers callers the
Incomplete Call Handling service.
Call Queuing
Announcement
Mode
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
If set to "Enable," callers on hold are informed of their
current position in the call hold queue.
Example:
"One other person is queuing."
Call Retrieval
Announcement
Timing
1-30 s
(2)
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieved
during call holding.
Example:
"To cancel holding, press 2 now.
Otherwise, I'll try your party again."
Redialing
Cancel Timing
1. 15 s
2. 30 s
3. 45 s
4. 60 s
(30)
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
messages that ask if continuous redials are to be
attempted during call holding.
Example:
"To continue holding, press 1.
Otherwise, press 2."
Other Parameters - Rotary Telephone Service
For callers who are calling from rotary telephones (unable to input touchtone signals) or who
are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance, this parameter specifies how they are treated.
Installation Manual
237
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
To select Rotary Telephone Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 6
Table 64
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Rotary
1. G. D. M.
Telephone Call 2. Operator
Coverage
Extension
(Day),(Night)
(G. D. M.)
Description/Function
Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary
telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with
the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service.
Note: G.D.M. = General Delivery Mailbox.
Other Parameters - Intercom Paging Parameter
Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller's party through
telephone speakers. To utilise this feature, the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature
available and the VPS must be properly programmed. This feature is available for APT/DPT
Integration mode only.
To select the Intercom Paging Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 7
238
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 65
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Intercom
Paging
Sequence
Up to 12 digits con- Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by
sisting of 0-9, , # the PBX. It can be programmed using up to 12 of the
and special codes following 8 letters and 12 dial codes.
(FXW)
D: Disconnect
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Pager Dialling
A: Answer
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Digits
Release for
Intercom
Paging
Up to 12 digits con- Specifies the intercom paging release code required by
sisting of 0-9, , # the PBX. It can be programmed using up to 12 of the 8
and special codes letters and 12 dial digits as specified above.
(F)
No Answer
Time for
Intercom
Paging
1-30 s
(5)
When there is no answer, this parameter specifies the
length of time (in seconds) the VPS must wait before
concluding Intercom Paging.
The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer expires.
Announcement
Repeat Cycle
1-3 times
(1)
Specifies the number of times the intercom page will
be announced.
Example:
"I have a call for (mailbox owner's name)."
Intercom
Paging Retry
1-10 times
(2)
Specifies the number of times paging will be retried
when the paging destination is busy or if there is no
answer.
Note: This setting applies when the subscriber has set
only "Intercom Paging" status to enable in Incomplete
Call Handling Status.
Installation Manual
239
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 65
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Paging Code
for Group 1-8
Description/Function
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, ,# for each
Paging Code
group
for All Groups
(Group 1-8: 331338
(for KX-TA series)
or
6301-6308
(for KX-TD816/
1232)
or
631-638
(for KX-TD612)
All Groups
(Group 9): 33
(for KX-TA series)
or
63 (for KXTD816/1232/612))
Specifies the intercom paging access code required by
the PBX.
Note: The Intercom Paging Group Number available
for each Subscriber is determined on a COS-by-COS
basis.
Other Parameters - Fax Management
The VPS can be programmed to automatically transfer incoming fax calls to a fax extension.
A maximum of 2 fax extensions can be specified as the destination for the Automatic Fax
Transfer. If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the VPS will transfer the
fax transmission to the alternate fax extension.
To select Fax Management, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 8
Table 66
Parameter
Automatic
Transfer of
Incoming Fax
Call
240
Value Range
(Default)
1: Disable
2: Enable
(Disable)
Description/Function
Used to enable or disable the Automatic Transfer of
Incoming Fax Call Service.
Note: Automatic detection works for only the first 30s.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 66
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Main Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the main fax extension number.
Alternate Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the backup fax extension number used when the
main fax extension is busy or if there is no answer within
the specified "Fax No Answer Time." When either of
these situations occurs, the VPS transfers the fax call to
the backup extension.
5-60 s
(10)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must
wait before taking other action when there is no answer at
either fax extension.
Fax No Answer
Time
Note: This timer applies to the fax call that has been
transferred to the main or alternate fax extension.
Fax Manager
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Fax No Answer 1. No
Coverage Mode 2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number. The VPS
will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls
depending upon the settings of the "Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode" and "Fax Notification Mode "
parameters.
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager's mailbox.
Example: "The FAX transfer situation is as follows. One
attempt was no answer."
1) If set to "Ext", the VPS will call the Fax Manager's
extension to specify the number of unanswered fax
calls received.
2) If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager's
mailbox.
3) If set to "No", the VPS will take no action
concerning unanswered fax calls.
Installation Manual
241
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 66
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Fax Notification 1. No
Mode
2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
Description/Function
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager's
mailbox.
Example: "You have 1 FAX message."
1) If set to "Ext", after a fax extension successfully
receives a fax call, the VPS will automatically call
the Fax Manager's extension and play a voice
prompt - "You have 1 FAXmessage." The VPS will
also leave the total number of received fax calls in
the Fax Manager's mailbox.
2) If set to "No", the VPS will not take any action
concerning successfully received fax calls.
Other Parameters - Disconnect Parameter
To select the Disconnect Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 5 - 7 - 9
Table 67
Parameter
Maximum
Silence Time
242
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
5-60 s
(10)
The VPS will disconnect the call if silence is detected for
more than the specified time.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B7
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - HARDWARE
SETTINGS
For System Administration (system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis) an RS-232C
terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS.
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6
B7.1
RS-232C Parameters
To the RS-232C Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 1
Table 68
Parameter
Baud Rate
Word Bit
Length
Value Range
(Default)
1. 300 bps
2. 600 bps
3. 1200 bps
4. 2400 bps
5. 4800 bps
6. 9600 bps
7. 19200 bps
8. 38400 bps
(9600)
1. 7 bits
2. 8 bits
(8)
Description/Function
Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred (bits
per second).
Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
Parity
1. None
2. Odd
3. Even
(None)
Specifies the parity used for error detection.
Stop Bit
Length
1. 1 bit
2. 2 bits
(1)
Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of
the byte.
Installation Manual
243
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B7.2
Port Setting
To select Port Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 2
Port Setting Menu
To select the Port Setting Menu for Port 1, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 2 - 1
Table 69
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Flash Time
1. 100 ms
2. 300 ms
3. 600 ms
4. 900 ms
(100)
Specifies the duration of the flash (recall) signal that the
VPS will send to the PBX.
CPC Signal
1. None
2. 6.5 ms
3. 150 ms
4. 300 ms
5. 450 ms
6. 600 ms
(None)
Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an
interruption in the line power (CPC - Calling Party
Control signal) received from the PBX. The VPS is
able to determine that the line has been disconnected
when a CPC signal has been detected.
Disconnect
Time
Dial Mode
1-8 s
(2)
1. DTMF
2. Pulse 10 pps
3. Pulse 20 pps
(DTMF)
Specifies the length of time the line is temporarily
unavailable after a call has ended.
Specifies the dial mode for DTMF (touchtone) or Pulse.
If Pulse is specified, pulse speed (10/20 pps) must be
selected.
Note: This setting only affects outward dialling from
the VPS. The VPS can only receive DTMF (touchtone)
signals.
244
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Note
The port assignment procedure for Port 2 is the same as Port 1.
B7.3
PBX Interface Parameters
Three separate parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signalling and performance
with the PBX.
To select PBX Interface Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 3
Dialing Parameters
These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers, setup
outgoing calls, and control message waiting lamps on extensions. The procedure for
verifying the correct code sequences for non-Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems is
to manually execute the sequences from a single line telephone (SLT) with the PBX.
To select Dialing Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 3 - 1
Table 70
Parameter
PBX Type
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Other Manufacturers
2. KX-T Series
1. T308/T616
2. T1232
3. T96
4. T336
5. TD816/TD1232
6. TD308
7. TA series
8. TD612
(TD816/TD1232)
Specifies the type of PBX connected to the VPS. In
the case of a Panasonic KX-T series telephone
system, the model number should also be specified.
Note: The Dialing Parameters are set automatically to
each PBX default value after selecting the PBX type.
245
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 71
PBX Type
Other
Manufacturers
KX-T series
T308/
T616
T1232
Inband Inband Inband Inband
T96
T336
Integration
Mode
Inband
None
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on
No Answer
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
TD816/1232/
308/612
TA series
DPT
Inband
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
FTX
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
FWW
F
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
FWW
F
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
FWW
F
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None
N/A
T701X
T#91X T 9X T701X
#
—
T701X
#
—
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None
N/A
T702X
T#90X
#
Call Waiting
Sequence
None
N/A
1
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
None
N/A
F
246
*1
*2
APT
T#9X
T700X
—
T702X
#
—
N/A
N/A
2
2
2
2
N/A
N/A
F
F
F
F
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
*1
When your KX-TD series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode.
*2
When your KX-TA series telephone system is in APT Integration mode.
N/A
—
Not available
Not needed
Table 72
Parameter
Integration
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
1. None
2. Inband
3. APT
4. DPT
(DPT)
Description/Function
Specifies the method of integrating the VPS with the
PBX.
1. None - Both PBX and VPS work independently,
without accessing information concerning the status
of the other.
2. Inband - The PBX sends touchtone codes to the VPS
to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,
disconnect, etc.). VPS performance is improved with
Inband Integration because call state recognition is
faster than with standard call progress tone detection.
The PBX code for each call state must be set in the
Inband Signaling Parameters. If PBX type is set to a
KX-T series telephone system, the Inband Signaling
Parameters will automatically default to the proper
codes. This is available with any of the following
Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems:
TA series, T96, T336, TD816, TD1232, TD612.
3. APT - The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
APT interface. This is available only with Panasonic
KX-TA series.
4. DPT - The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
DPT interface. This is available with any of the
following Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
systems: TD816, TD1232, TD612.
If set to "APT" or "DPT", the extension numbers of VPS
Port 1 and VPS Port 2 can be assigned in a subparameter.
Extension
Number of
VPS Port 1
Installation Manual
Specifies the extension number of VPS port 1.
2-5 digits
(107 (for KX-TA
series) or
265 (for KXTD816/1232/
612))
247
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 72
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Specifies the extension number of VPS port 2.
2-5 digits
(108 (for KX-TA
series) or
266 (for KXTD816/1232/
612))
Extension
Number of
VPS Port 2
To program the following 10 Parameters on the following page, use the Special Commands
and Dial Codes listed below. Up to 12 digits can be set for each parameter.
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Extension dialling
A: Answer
1-9, 0,
, #: Dial Codes
Table 73
Parameter
Description/Function
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
(FX)
This sequence is performed by the VPS when transferring
calls to the operator's extension.
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
(FX)
This sequence is performed by the VPS when transferring
calls to any extension except the operator's.
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
248
Value Range
(Default)
(FX)
This sequence is performed by the VPS when transferring
calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
(F)
If an extension is busy, this sequence allows the VPS to
reconnect to the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
No Answer
(F)
If the extension does not answer, this sequence allows the
VPS to reconnect to the caller.
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 73
Parameter
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
Value Range
(Default)
(F)
(None)
(None)
Call Waiting
Sequence
(2)
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
(F)
Description/Function
This sequence is performed by the VPS to retrieve a call
placed on hold after the extension (in Call Screening
mode) has refused to accept it.
The dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to
enable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
This is the dialling sequence that the VPS must perform to
disable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
This sequence is carried out by the VPS when performing
call waiting if the extension being called is busy.
This sequence is performed by the VPS to cease call
waiting.
Inband Signaling Parameters
These parameters are used if the PBX sends touchtones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call
(busy, answered, disconnected, etc.). The integration Mode must be set to "Inband." If PBX
type is set to a KX-T series telephone system, the Inband Signaling parameters will
automatically default to the proper codes.
To select Inband Signaling Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 3 - 2
The following parameters can be programmed using "0-9", " ", "#", and "A-D."
Table 74
Parameter
Ringback
Busy
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
(1)
Indicates "Ringback Tone." Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialled is ringing.
(2)
Indicates "Busy Tone." Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialled is busy.
249
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 74
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Reorder
(3)
Indicates "Reorder Tone." Sent to the VPS when an
invalid extension number is dialled or when inadvertently
connected to another VPS.
(4)
Indicates "Do Not Disturb Tone." Sent to the VPS if the
dialled extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled.
(5)
Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the
call.
Forward to VM
Ringing
(6)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to
accept the call.
Forward to VM
Busy
(7)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to
accept the call.
DND
Answer
Forward to
Other
Extension
Confirmation
Disconnect
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to
another, non-voice mail extension.
(8)
(9)
Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialled a Message
Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code.
(#9)
Sent to the VPS when the other party goes "on-hook."
Note
Default values in the above table vary depending on the settings of "PBX type" and "Inband
Integration" (PBX Interface Parameters).
Table 75
Parameter
Other
Manufacturers
KX-T series
T308/
T616
T1232
T96
T336
TD816/
1232/
612
TD308
TA
series
Ringback
N/A
N/A
1
A1
A1
1
1
1
Busy
N/A
N/A
2
B1
B1
2
2
2
Reorder
N/A
N/A
3
B2
B2
3
3
3
DND
N/A
N/A
4
B3
B3
4
4
4
Answer
N/A
N/A
5
A2
A2
5
5
5
Forward to VM
Ringing
N/A
N/A
6
C1
C1
6
6
6
250
Installation Manual
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Table 75
Parameter
Other
Manufacturers
KX-T series
T308/
T616
T1232
T96
T336
TD816/
1232/
612
TD308
TA
series
Forward to VM
Busy
N/A
N/A
7
C2
C2
7
7
7
Forward to
Other Extension
N/A
N/A
8
C3
C3
8
8
8
Confirmation
N/A
N/A
9
D1
D1
9
9
9
Disconnect
N/A
N/A
#9
DD
DD
#9
#9
#9
N/A: Not available
Digit Translation Table Parameters
The Digit Translation Table is used to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the
proper codes for the VPS. This translation table is only effective for incoming signals.
To select the Digit Translation Table Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 3 - 3
Digit Translation Table Parameters - Inter-Digit Timeout
To select Inter - Digit Timeout, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 3 - 3 - 1
Table 76
Parameter
Inter-digit
Timeout
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-4 s
(1)
This parameter defines the incoming signal interval
(Follow on ID). The Digit Translation Table will translate
signals received within the specified time period.
251
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Digit Translation Table Parameters - Input/Output
To select Input/Output, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 6 - 3 - 3 - 2
Table 77
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Table Input digit
1-8
Up to 8
digits
consisting of
Output
digit
252
Description/Function
Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming
signal. If this occurs, the system will use the first
assignment.
0-9, , #,
A-D
(None)
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Appendix
C
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual
253
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C1
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
The System Manager's Mailbox must be accessed before any System Manager task can be
performed. Three items of information must be known before accessing the System Manager's
Mailbox — the telephone number answered by Voice Mail Service, the System Manager's
Mailbox Number and the Password for that mailbox (if assigned). The System Manager's
Mailbox Number is 99, 999, 9999 or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number length
specified in System Programming. The System Manager's password is assigned through the
System Manager's Service.
To Access the System Manager's Mailbox
1. Dial an extension number providing Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS extension
number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Please enter the person's mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
2. Press [ ], then Enter the System Manager's Mailbox Number (99, 999, 9999 or 99999).
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3. Enter the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of System Manager's Service will be
played:
You have (number) new message(s).
To receive the message, press [1].
To deliver a message, press [2].
To customise your mailbox, press [3].
To check the mailbox distribution, press [4].
For a system report, press [5].
For other features, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
254
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C2
SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The System Manager's primary function is to create mailboxes for new Subscribers and to
maintain system organization by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a computer, the System Manager cannot set
up mailboxes and "Sorry, this function is not available. " is played.
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager is able to both create and edit Subscriber mailboxes. Mailboxes can be
created or edited by following the steps below.
At any step, when editing an assigned mailbox's parameters, change current settings by
Pressing [1]. To leave the current setting unchanged, Press [2].
When creating a new mailbox, the following parameters can be set:
•
•
•
•
Mailbox Number
Subscriber's Name - recorded by the subscriber
Extension Number
Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber's Last Name - Only the first 3 or 4 letters of the
owner's last name are entered.
• Class of Service Number - Any COS number (1-62) may be entered.
• Interview Mailbox Number - Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from
Subscriber Mailbox Numbers
• All Calls Transfer Mailbox
The steps listed below must be followed when creating, changing or deleting any mailbox
parameter.
1. Log in to the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [1] to Assign or Edit.
5. Enter the mailbox number.
Installation Manual
255
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
6. Press [2] to accept the entry.
7. As each parameter is played:
a) Press [1] to enter the new parameter or [2] to leave the parameter unchanged.
b) Enter the parameter and Press [1].
c) Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
8. The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered. When this
entry is completed, the prompt at Step 4 will appear. Continue assigning or editing other
mailboxes by repeating Steps 5-7.
9. To return to the Main Menu, Press [ ] twice.
Deleting a Mailbox
When mailboxes are no longer needed, they must be deleted. While another person accesses
the VPS, the action is automatically cancelled.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [2] for Delete.
5. Enter the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the mailbox.
Deleting a Mailbox Password
When a password is forgotten the password must be deleted by the System Manager before it
can be reassigned by the subscriber.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
256
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for the Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [3] for reset Password.
5. Enter the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the password.
Installation Manual
257
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C3
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS
Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to Subscribers. A maximum of 64
Classes of Services can be established. Each Class of Service can be set using the telephone.
COS No. 63 and No. 64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System Manager
respectively.
For a complete explanation of COS parameters, please see Table 38 and Table 39 in Appendix
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
The Class of Service parameters listed below are set by following the procedure steps listed:
• *1Personal Greeting Length - Length ranges from 8-60 s in 4 s increments.
• New Message Retention Time - Maximum time is 30 days.
• Saved Message Retention Time - Up to 30 days/0: Unlimited.
• Message Length - Length ranges from 1-6 min/0: Unlimited.
• Number of Messages - The number of messages range from 5-100.
• Total Message Time - Total message time ranges from 5-100 min/0: Unlimited.
• Message Retrieval Order - Settings are LIFO (last in first out) or FIFO (first in first out).
• Message Scanning with Information - Settings are enable or disable.
• *1Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Status - Settings are enable or disable.
• *1Call Waiting on Busy Status - Settings are enable or disable.
• *1Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Status - Settings are enable or disable.
• *1Direct Mailbox Access Status - Settings are enable or disable.
• *1Intercom Paging Group Number - 1-9
• Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
1. System Prompt
2. User 1 Prompt
3. User 2 Prompt
*2
• Remote Call Forward to CO—Settings are enable or disable.
• Delete Message Confirmation—Settings are enable or disable.
• *1Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement - 0-30
• *1Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID - Settings are enable or disable
• *1Caller ID Screening - Settings are enable or disable
• *2Message Notification Status - Settings are enable or disable
• *1External Message Delivery Status - Settings are enable or disable
• *1Auto Forwarding Status - Settings are enable or disable
*1
*2
258
Not available for COS No.63 (Message Manager) and COS No.64 (System Manager)
Not available for COS No.64 (System Manager)
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a computer, the System Manager cannot
set COS parameters and "Sorry, this function is not available." is played.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [2] to set the Class of Service.
4. Enter the Class of Service Number (1-64).
Personal Greeting Length
5.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Enter the Personal Greeting length (8 -60 s).
Note
The value goes up in increments of 4 s.
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
New Message Retention Time
6.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Enter the retention time (up to 30 days).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Saved Message Retention Time
7.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Enter the retention time (up to 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
259
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Message Length
8.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Enter the message length (1-6 min or 0: Unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Number of Messages
9.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Enter the number of messages (5-100).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Total Message Time
10.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Enter the total message time (5-100 min or 0: Unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Retrieval Order
11.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current order (LIFO or FIFO).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Scanning with Information
12.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Status
13.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
260
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Call Waiting on Busy Status
14.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
15.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Direct Mailbox Access Status
16.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Intercom Paging Group Number
17.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Enter the group number (1-9).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Note
If set to "9 (Group 9)," the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups (1-8).
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
18.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1], [2], or [3] to change the desired mode.
• [1] System Prompt
• [2] User 1 Prompt
• [3] User 2 Prompt
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
Installation Manual
261
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Remote Call Forward to CO
19.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Delete Message Confirmation
20.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement
21.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Enter the number of Caller IDs (0-30).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID
22.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Caller ID Screening
23.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
262
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Message Notification Status
24.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If the
Message Notification Status is enabled, go to Step 22 b) below.
b) Press [1], [2], [3], [4], or [5] to choose the desired Beeper Callback Number Entry
Mode.
• [1] Caller Select Mode
• [2] Without message mode
• [3] Before message recording mode
• [4] After message recording mode
• [5] Disable All Entry Mode (Caller cannot access beeper (pager))
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [6] to accept it.
d) The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message is played. Press [1]
to change the setting (enable or disable).
e) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
f) The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message is played. Press [1]
to change the setting (enable or disable).
g) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
External Message Delivery Status
25.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If the
External Message Delivery Status is enabled, set the prompt mode for receiving
External Delivery Messages (go to Step 23 b) below).
b) The current prompt mode is played. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired
mode.
• [1] System Prompt
• [2] User 1 Prompt
• [3] User 2 Prompt
• [4] Selective Prompt
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [5] to accept it.
Installation Manual
263
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Auto Forwarding Status
26.
a) The current setting is played. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If Auto
Forwarding Status is enabled, go to Step 24 b) below.
b) The current forwarding mailbox number is played. Press [1] to change the mailbox
number.
c) Enter the mailbox number.
d) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
e) The current delay time is played. Press [1] to change the setting. The delay time is the
period of time that must pass before the message is automatically forwarded. For
example, 1 h and 15 min is 115#, 30 min is 30#.
f) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
g) The current forwarding mode is played. Press [1] to change the setting (copy or move).
h) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
264
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C4
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The system clock can be set directly from the telephone. It is important to set the exact time
because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery, redialling and
rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion, are all
scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able to
set this clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and
ends.
Note
The System Manager cannot set the system clock while:
• the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer,
• the Message Manager sets the system clock, records the Voice Labels and System
Caller Names, and customises the Message Manager's Mailbox.
The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [3] to set the time and date.
4. Press [1] to change the current time.
5. Enter the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o'clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15,
press 5, 1, 5, and #."
6. Press [1] for AM or for [2] PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of 'AM/PM' in Time
Stamp" in Table 57 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
7. Press [2] to accept the time.
8. Press [1] to change the current date.
9. Enter the current month and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #."
Installation Manual
265
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
10. Enter the day and Press [#].
11. Enter the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
12. Press [2] to accept the date.
266
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C5
CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Services); however, the System Manager or
System Administrator can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific
Service Mode.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is retained unless the System Manager or System
Administrator changes it again, even after the power is cut and restored.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot change the Service Mode setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
Assigning the Service Mode
There are 6 Service Modes available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in Lunch Mode
Manual Break Mode: Operates only in Break Mode
PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period (available only
with APT/DPT Integration)
In the Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday service has the highest priority.)
In the Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), Holiday Service is disregarded:
Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service is disregarded.)
In the PBX Control Mode: (1) under DPT Integration, the VPS obtains the Time Service (Day,
Night, Lunch or Break) setting from the PBX when a call is received through a PBX and
operates accordingly; (2) under APT Integration, the VPS obtains the Time Service setting
from the PBX when the time period changes at the PBX or APT data link has been established
between the VPS and PBX.
When the Integration Mode is other than APT/DPT Integration and the PBX Control Mode is
selected, the VPS will operate in the Automatic Mode.
Installation Manual
267
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, the PBX Control
Mode may not function properly. For more information, consult your dealer.
Follow the steps below to assign a Service Mode.
1. Log in the main menu.
2. Press [6] for other features.
3. Press [4] to change Service Mode setting.
4. The VPS plays the current setting. Press [1] to change the setting.
5. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to choose the desired Service Mode entry.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
[2] Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
[3] Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
[4] Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in the Lunch Mode
[5] Manual Break Mode: Operates only in the Break Mode
[6] PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
268
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C6
CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING
SETTING
Company Greeting greets all incoming callers. The System Manager or System Administrator
can choose the appropriate company greeting to each individual Time Service period (Day,
Night, Lunch, and Break) for each port and trunk (outside line) group. The default is set at the
System Greeting prior to factory shipment.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot change the Company Greeting setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [5] to change Company Greeting setting.
4. Press [1] to change the port setting, or [2] to change the trunk service setting.
5. Enter 1-2 (port number) or 1-24 (trunk group number).
6. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired Time Service period entry.
•
•
•
•
[1] Day Time service
[2] Night Time service
[3] Lunch Time service
[4] Break Time service
7. The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting.
8. Press [1], [2], or [3] to choose the desired setting entry.
• [1] To change Company Greeting number
• [2] To set System Greeting—Go to Step 10
• [3] To disable—Go to Step 10
9. Enter the Company Greeting number 1-32.
Installation Manual
269
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
10. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
270
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C7
CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM
REPORTS)
Eight System Reports can be generated to help monitor the VPS operating status. The reports
are sent from the RS-232C port to either a printer or a terminal. The System Administrator is
also able to output System Reports.
Obtaining System Reports
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], or [8] to obtain the desired report.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] System Service Report
[2] Flash Memory Usage Report
[3] Port Usage Report
[4] Mailbox Usage Report
[5] Mailbox Parameter Report
[6] Call Account Report
[7] Class of Service Parameter Report
[8] Fax Call Report
Note
The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as "Mailbox Assignments." The Class of
Service Parameter Report is displayed as "COS Assignments."
4. For Flash Memory Usage Report, Port Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report or Fax Call
Report, Press [1]. To generate the Mailbox Usage Report, go to Step 5.
5. Mailbox Usage Report - Enter the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-digit
mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System Report
Menu will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range and Enter the mailbox number of the end of the
range or Press [2] to obtain all mailbox usage counts. This mailbox number is the end of
the mailbox range. The mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range.
For example, to specify the mailbox range 201 through 309, enter 201 in Step 5 and 309 in
Installation Manual
271
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Step 6.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a computer, a System Report will not be
generated. The System Report starts to be generated after the System Administrator
has completed programming and system prompt [>] is displayed on the computer.
Clearing the Reports
The Port Usage, Flash Memory Usage, Mailbox Usage, and Fax Call Reports can be cleared.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [2] to clear the Flash Memory Usage Reports, [3] to clear the Port Usage Reports, [4]
to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, or [8] to clear the Fax Call Report.
4. Press [2] to clear the report. To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, go to the Step 5.
5. Enter the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-digit
mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System Report
Menu will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range, and Enter the mailbox number of the end of the
range. Press [2] to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports.
272
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C8
DELIVERING MESSAGES
There are 2 methods of delivering messages. The distributions of each message can also be
checked.
Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
An identical message can be delivered to all VPS Subscribers at the same time. This procedure
is referred to as Broadcasting Messages. The message to be broadcast is recorded in the System
Manager's mailbox. This feature is useful when informing Subscribers about the current VPS
status such as remaining flash memory capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be
erased, etc.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [1] to record a broadcast message.
4. Record a broadcast message and Press [1].
5. Press [2] to accept the message recorded.
Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes
Messages can be delivered to more than 1 Subscriber's mailbox by specifying the mailboxes
for delivery.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [2] to deliver a message.
4. Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
Note
Enter by name by Pressing [#] [1] first.
Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number.
Installation Manual
273
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
5. Press [2] to accept the number if it is correct.
Note
Add mailbox numbers by Pressing [2]. Review the mailing list by Pressing [3] and
cancel message transfer by Pressing [ ].
6. Press [1] to record a message.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the entry made.
9. Press [1] to specify the delivery time and the private status.
Note
Send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu by Pressing [2].
10. Press [1] to specify the delivery time.
11. Enter the time and Press [#].
12. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of 'AM/PM' in Time
Stamp" in Table 57 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
13. Enter the date (month and day) and Press [#].
14. Press [2] to accept the entry made.
15. Press [1] to make this message private; otherwise, Press [2].
Checking Mailbox Distribution
This parameter is used to check if messages have been delivered to recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to check distribution status.
3. Press [3] to cancel the message or delete verification.
274
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Note
Listen to messages by Pressing [1]. Check the previous message by Pressing [1] twice.
Check the next message by Pressing [2].
4. Press [1] to delete verification of this message, or [2] to cancel message delivery.
Installation Manual
275
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C9
CUSTOMISING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
In order to ensure system security and prevent dial through fraud, a password must be
established consisting of up to 10 numeric characters. Anyone requesting access to the System
Manager's service will be required to enter this password before proceeding.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a computer, this service cannot be accessed
and "Sorry, this function is not available." is played.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customise the mailbox. The current setting will be played.
3. Press [1] to change the mailbox password.
4. Type the password and Press [#].
Note
If a password is not needed Press [#]. It is recommended to set the password to
maintain security.
5. Press [2] to accept the entry.
Note
Be sure to set a password to the System Manager's Mailbox and the Message Manager's
Mailbox to protect system security against hackers and dial through fraud.
276
Installation Manual
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C10
LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER
MESSAGES
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message with the sender identified along with when the message was
recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installation Manual
[1]Repeat this message
[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
[2] Play the Next Message
[3] Erase this Message
[4] Reply
[5] Rewind
[6] Fast Forward
[7] Transfer
[8] Message Scan
277
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
278
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Appendix
D
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual
279
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D1
ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager's Mailbox must be accessed before any Message Manager task can be
performed. Three items of information are required before accessing the Message Manager's
Mailbox — the telephone number answered by Voice Mail Service, the Message Manager's
Mailbox Number, and the Message Manager's Password. The Message Manager's Mailbox
Number is 98, 998, 9998, or 99998 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in
System Programming. The Message Manager's password is assigned through the Message
Manager's Service.
To Access the Message Manager's Mailbox
1. Dial an extension number providing Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS extension
number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Please enter the person's mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
2. Press [ ], then enter the Message Manager's Mailbox Number 98, 998, 9998 or 99998.
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3. Enter the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of Message Manager's Service will
be played.
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customise your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To end this call, press [ ].
280
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D2
MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY
MAILBOX
One of the Message Manager's functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for
messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox. This can be done at any time using the
telephone.
Listening to Messages
The status of the General Delivery Mailbox is monitored through the Message Manager's
Mailbox. Messages stored there can be listened to and, if necessary, transferred to their
intended recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message with the sender identified along with when the message was
recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Repeat this Message
[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
[2] Play the Next Message
[3] Erase this Message
[4] Reply
[5] Rewind
[6] Fast Forward
[7] Transfer
[8] Message Scan
Transferring Messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients
with any necessary attached voice comments. We recommend that once a message has been
transferred, the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [1] to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox.
Installation Manual
281
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
3. The VPS plays the first (next/last) message. Press [7] to transfer the message.
4. Enter the destination mailbox number.
5. Press [2] to accept the number.
6. Press [2] to transfer with comment.
Note
Messages can be transferred without comment by Pressing [1]. A mailbox number can
be added by Pressing [3]. The Mailing List can be reviewed by Pressing [4].
7. Record the comments and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the comments entered.
282
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D3
SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION
The VPS is able to notify the Message Manager that unplayed messages are waiting in the
Message Manager's Mailbox. Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available —
Notification by Message Waiting Lamp and Notification by Calling.
Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status
The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager's Mailbox.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status, or [2] to accept it.
Setting Notification by Calling Status
The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper (pager) when a new message is recorded in the
mailbox. Set the following parameters as appropriate.
Setting Device Status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The
Message Manager cannot enable a device according to a schedule. The System Administrator
must accomplish this task (see "Time Frame 1, 2" in Table 36 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION - MAILBOXES).
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [2] to change the notification method.
Installation Manual
283
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
4. Enter the device number (1-3).
Note
If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number, you
cannot set the device status. See "Assigning Notification Numbers" to assign a
telephone number.
5. Press [1], [2], or [3] to select the device status.
• [1] Schedule (enabled on the schedule)
• [2] Continuously (enabled whole day)
• [3] Not Used (disabled whole day)
Assigning Notification Numbers
Up to 3 telephone or beeper (pager) numbers can be set for message notification. The 0 to 9
keys, the tone/pulse switch, and the beeper (pager) Callback Number Display Entry Code [X]
are used to make these assignments.
When the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper (pager) number, the
notification is made in a different way. The VPS will ask the caller to enter the number to be
called and will display this number on the beeper (pager). The setting of the Callback Number
Entry can be set to before the message, after the message, or with no message depending on
System Programming.
It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not enter a callback number. The System
Manager must authorise the use of Beeper Callback No. Entry Code.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [3] to assign the Telephone Number.
4. Press [1] to change the first telephone number, [2] to change the second telephone number,
or [3] to change the third telephone number.
5. Press [1] to set the telephone number.
6. Enter the telephone number.
7. Press [2] to accept the entry.
• [1] Change the telephone number
• [2] Accept
284
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
•
•
•
•
•
•
[3] Review
[4] Add more digits
[5] Insert a pause
[6] Set dial mode
[7] Insert a wait for dial tone
[8] Insert a beeper (pager) display command
8. Press [1] to be notified by telephone or [2] by a beeper (pager).
Installation Manual
285
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D4
CUSTOMISING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager is able to customise the Message Manager's mailbox by specifying: (1)
the password; (2) the extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3; or (3) Telephone numbers 1
and 2 as the call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside
(CO) line.
Note
While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the Message
Manager cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
Message Manager's Password
The Message Manager can specify the password at any time using the telephone. The password
contains up to 10 numeric characters. It must be entered to execute the message management
operation.
Operator's Extensions
When callers require help, they can Press [0] on their telephone keypad to be transferred to an
operator extension. In each Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Modes, up to 3 operators (Operator
1, 2, 3) can be specified. The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will
be for the Message Manager.
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO
The customisation of the Message Manager's mailbox only allows you to assign Telephone
number 1 and/or 2; to enable call forwarding to the telephone number assigned by following
the steps below, follow the instructions in D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET.
If you should change the telephone number after you have enabled call forwarding to an
outside (CO) line, you must go back to D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET to reset
the call forwarding setting; otherwise, you will be transferring calls to the old telephone
number unknowingly.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customise Mailbox.
286
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the password. If a
password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current setting—
Go to Step 6.
4. Enter the password and Press [#].
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
6. The VPS plays the current operator's extension setting. Press [1] to change or assign the
operator's extension. Press [2] to accept the current setting, or Press [3] to delete the current
setting—Go to Step 9.
Note
Operator 1's extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Enter the extension number.
8. The VPS plays the current extension setting. Press [2] to accept it.
9. Repeat Steps 6-8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and
Break Modes for each operator.
10. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [1] to change the telephone
number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 11. Press [2] to accept
the current setting—Go to Step 13.
11. Enter the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
• Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code (to
seize an outside [CO] line).
• The maximum number of characters allowed to be entered is 16.
12. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
13. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [1] to change the telephone
number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 14. Press [2] to accept
the current setting.
14. Enter the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
15. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
287
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Note
Be sure to set a password to the System Manager's Mailbox and the Message Manager's
Mailbox to protect system security against hackers and dial through fraud.
288
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D5
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The system clock can be set directly from the telephone. It is important to set the exact time
because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery, redialling and
rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion, are all
scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and System Manager are also able to
set this clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and
ends.
Note
The Message Manager cannot set the system clock while:
• the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer,
• the System Manager sets mailboxes and Class of Service (COS), and customises the
System Manager's Mailbox.
The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to set the time and date.
3. Press [1] to change the current setting.
4. Enter the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o'clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15,
press 5, 1, 5, and #."
5. Press [1] for AM or for [2] PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of 'AM/PM' in Time
Stamp" in Table 57 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
6. Press [2] to accept the time.
7. Press [1] to change the current date.
8. Enter the current month and Press [#].
Installation Manual
289
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #."
9. Enter the day and Press [#].
10. Enter the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
11. Press [2] to accept the date entered.
290
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D6
RECORDING MESSAGES
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (specifically:
menus, voice labels, user prompts, and system caller names). He is responsible for maintaining
the following:
• Company Greetings—Up to 32 company greetings for business/non-business and Lunch/
Break hours as well as holidays can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
• Company Name
• The Department Dialling Menu (maximum length: 6 min) - A caller can access departments
with the touch of one key. Nine Department Dialling selections (1 to 9) can be recorded.
• The Custom Service Menus (maximum length: 6 min each) - Up to 100 custom service
menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services they require without the
need for a human operator. This is the most useful and powerful feature of your Panasonic
Voice Processing System. For example, the Message Manager can record menus in a wide
variety of foreign languages.
• * The Voice Labels (maximum length: 6 min each) - Up to 20 System Group Distribution
Lists can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice label.
• The User Prompts (maximum length: 6 min each) - There are 3 kinds of voice mail prompts:
(1) System Prompts, (2) User 1 Prompts, and (3) User 2 Prompts. Generally, the System
Prompts should be left alone; they are recorded by the factory in English. However, User
1 and User 2 Prompts can be recorded by the Message Manager in any language he wishes.
• The Multilingual Selection Menu (maximum length: 6 min) - With this menu, callers can
select the language they prefer to hear all prompts (mentioned in the previous paragraph,
"The User Prompts"). For example, the Message Manager can record a menu like this:
For English, press 1.
For Spanish, press 2.
For Chinese, press 3.
• * The System Caller Names (maximum length: 4 s each) - Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can
be registered by the System Administrator. A name should be recorded for each Caller ID
number — this is a task for the Message Manager.
* While the System Administrator programmes via a personal computer, the Message
Manager cannot record the Voice Labels and System Caller Names. The VPS plays "Sorry,
this function is not available".
Installation Manual
291
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Recording Menus and Voice Labels
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Select the item number to be recorded.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Record the Company Greetings.
[2] Record the Company Name.
[3] Record the Department Dialling Menu.
[4] Record the Custom Service Menus.
[5] Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists.
[7] Record the Multilingual Selection Menu.
4. For the item selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
For the Company Greetings - Enter the Company Greeting Number (1-32).
For the Company Name - Go to Step 5.
For the Department Dialling Menu - Go to Step 5.
For the Custom Service Menus - Enter a Custom Service Number (1-100).
Enter [0] to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
• For the Voice Labels - Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be
labelled. (List numbers are assigned by the System Administrator.)
• For the Multilingual Selection Menu - Go to Step 5.
5. The VPS plays the current message. Press [1] to change the message. If a message has not
yet been recorded, go to Step 7.
6. Press [1] to record the message. Press [2] to erase the current message and return to Step 3
or 4.
7. Record the message at the tone, Press [1] to end recording.
8. Press [2] to accept the message.
Note
• Press [1] to review the recorded message.
• Press [3] to erase the recorded message and try again.- Return to Step 7.
• Press [4] to add a message.
• Press [ ] to erase the recorded message and exit. - Return to Step 3.
9. Other Custom Service Menus and/or Voice Labels can be recorded by repeating Steps 3-8.
292
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Recording User Prompts
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [6] to modify user prompts.
4. Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or [2] to change User Prompt 2.
5. To change specific prompts, Go to Step 6.
To change all prompts in a row without reviewing the current recording, Go to Step 7.
6. To change specific prompts:
a) Press [1]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of modifiable
prompts in D9
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.)
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded, the VPS plays the
system prompt—go to Step 6g. (If you wish to turn off a certain prompt, please first
record a "dummy" prompt. Then go back to Step 6 and you will be able to turn it off by
going through these steps.)
Note
• Press [2] to return to Step 6b.
e) The VPS plays the current prompt. Press [1] to change the prompt.
Note
• Press [2] to retain the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
f) Press [1] to record a new prompt.
Note
• Press [2] to erase the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
• Press [3] to turn off/on the specified prompt—Return to Step 6b.
g) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
h) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Note
• Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
• Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 6f.
• Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Return to Step 6b.
i) Repeat Steps 6b to 6h to record other prompts.
Installation Manual
293
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
7. To change all prompts in a row:
a) Press [2]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of modifiable
prompts in D9
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.)
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt.
Note
• Press [2] to go to Step 7g.
• Press [3] to turn off/on the prompt.
e) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
f) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Note
• Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
• Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 7e.
• Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Go to Step 7g.
g) The VPS plays the next prompt number.
h) Repeat Steps 7d to 7g to record other prompts.
Note
User prompts can be saved in a personal computer (command SAVE through the RS-232C).
Once they have been saved, they can be restored (with the command LOAD) at any time.
There is a complete list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers in D9 LIST OF
MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.
Recording System Caller Names
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [8] to modify system caller names.
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number*1 (1-120) to be modified.
Note
• Enter [ ] to return to Step 3.
• To record system caller names, first Caller ID numbers must be assigned (see B6.6
System Caller Name Announcement.)
*1
Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
294
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
5. The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name. To change the name, Press [1]. If a name
has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to Step 6.
Note
• Press [2] to accept the current name. - Return to Step 4.
• Press [3] to erase the current name. - Return to Step 4.
6. Record the name at the tone and Press [1].
7. The VPS plays the recorded name. Press [2] to accept it.
Note
• Press [1] to change the recorded name. - Return to Step 6.
• Press [3] to erase the recorded name. - Return to Step 4.
8. Record names for other Caller ID List numbers by repeating Steps 4-7.
Installation Manual
295
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D7
REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
The Message Manager can program his extension (assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode)
from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone. There are six forwarding settings available:
• FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number.
• FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is
busy.
• FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there
is no answer.
• FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when
the line is busy or there is no answer.
• FWD to CO—Forward all incoming calls to Telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in
the Mailbox Setting), or to any other telephone number.
• FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding setting.
Notes:
• The Remote Call Forwarding Set feature is available with DPT Integration only.
• By default, the extension number for the Message Manager's extension (assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be used with
this feature. When using this feature, you must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
• FWD to CO must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilised (see
"Remote Call Forward to CO" in Table 39 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS).
Assigning the Remote Call Forwarding Set
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] to set Remote Call Forwarding.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to select the desired forwarding setting.
296
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] FWD All
[2] FWD Busy
[3] FWD No Answer
[4] FWD Busy or No Answer
[5] FWD to CO
[6] FWD Cancel
4. For the items selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
•
•
For FWD All—Go to Step 5.
For FWD Busy—Go to Step 5.
For FWD No Answer—Go to Step 5.
For FWD Busy or No Answer—Go to Step 5.
For FWD to CO—Go to Step 7.
For FWD Cancel—Go to Step 10.
5. Enter the extension number.
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the extension number—Return to Step 5.
7. Press [1] or [2] to select Telephone number 1 or Telephone number 2 (Go to Step 9), or
Press [3] to select another telephone number.
8. Enter the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
• Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code (to
seize an outside [CO] line).
• The maximum number of characters allowed to be entered is 16.
9. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the telephone number. Return to Step 7.
10. Call Forwarding is cancelled. Press [2] to accept it.
11. Call Forwarding setting data is transmitted to the PBX. If the forwarding setting or
cancelling has been completed properly, you will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call
forwarding is cancelled".
Installation Manual
297
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Note
If you hear "Call Forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination number",
the forwarding setting has not been completed properly at the PBX, possibly because
a nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. It is also possible
that the model of the connected PBX does not support the Remote Call Forwarding
Set, or its software version is lower than required; for more information, consult your
dealer.
298
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D8
LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND
AA SERVICE
There are over 900 voice prompts (all listed in the next section) and they come in 3 types.
(1) System Prompts—in English (cannot be modified)
(2) User 1 Prompts—recordable
(3) User 2 Prompts—recordable
However, in many cases it is not necessary to record all the voice prompts (recording over 900
voice prompts is a big undertaking). When an outside party calls AA service or VM service,
he only hears some of the following prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or
modify) these prompts. Please change prompts as needed for your application. For example,
prompt no. [819] could be "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the
Voice Processing System". (The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 min.)
Note
To identify the prompt(s) linked to each prompt listed below, refer to the next section,
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Table 78
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
248
Good afternoon
249
Good evening
250
Good morning
819
Welcome to the Voice Processing System
675
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
132
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person's last name
198
For 'Q', press 7
199
For 'Z', press 9
505
Sorry, there are no more matching names
513
Sorry, this name cannot be found
277
Incorrect entry
274
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line
618
To call the operator, press 0
49
Calling the operator
Installation Manual
299
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 78
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
417
Please wait a moment
818
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
416
Please leave a message at the tone
668
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
702
To pause and restart recording, press 2
732
To review, press 1
603
To accept, press 2
678
To erase and try again, press 3
614
To add, press 4
677
To erase and exit, press
697
To make this message private, press 1
392
Otherwise, press 2
531
Thank you for calling
VM Prompts
Table 79
Prompt No.
413
Modifiable Prompts
Please enter your person's mailbox number
AA Prompts
Table 80
Prompt No.
300
Modifiable Prompts
412
Please enter your person's extension
825
You have a call
502
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
695
To leave a message, press 1
672
To enter another extension, press
510
Sorry, this line is busy
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 80
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
276
If you would like to hold, press 1
622
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I'll try your party again
Installation Manual
301
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D9
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
The table below shows the modifiable prompts. Record prompts as User 1 or User 2. Some of
the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number. Whenever possible,
record related prompts together so that the assembled sentence flows naturally and sounds like
one voice. You can change all service prompts to User 1 or User 2 by changing the DIP Switch
setting (see Table 1 in 1.3.2 System Components).
If you wish to change some of service prompts to User 1 or User 2, but not all of them, please
see the following sections:
• B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS; "Prompt Mode" of Tables 38 and 39.
• B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION - PORT/TRUNK SERVICE; "Incoming Call
Service Prompt" of Tables 40 and 41.
• B5.2 Custom Service; "Prompt Mode" in Table 47.
• B6.5 Prompt Setting; Table 57.
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
1
20 members maximum
[509], [ 1]
2
8 members maximum
[509], [ 2]
3
After hours greeting is (message)
[ 3]
4
After hours greeting is not recorded
[ 4]
5
All pager entry modes are disabled
[ 5]
6
All calls transfer to mailbox disabled [ 6]
7
All calls transfer to mailbox enabled [ 7]
8
All mailboxes are assigned
[ 8]
9
All messages erased
[ 9]
10
All transfer services disabled
[ 10]
11
AM
[ 11]
12
and
[ 12]
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
[325], [ 12]
13
and transferred via (mailbox number) [ 13]
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
14
Answer length is (number)
[ 14], [454]
15
Any digit on the telephone keypad
can be used
[ 15]
302
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
16
APRIL
[ 16]
17
at
[ 17]
[594], [ 17]
[304], [432], [ 17]
[323], [17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
[158], [379], [ 17]
[318], [ 17]
[305], [816], [ 17]
[159], [ 17]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
18
(number) attempts were busy
[ 18]
19
(number) attempts were no answer
[ 19]
20
(number) attempts were successful
[ 20]
21
AUGUST
[ 21]
22
Auto forwarding disabled
[ 22]
23
Auto forwarding enabled
[ 23]
24
because message retention time
expired
[157], [815], [ 24]
25
Pager access disabled
[ 25]
26
Pager access enabled
[ 26]
27
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 27]
after message recording
28
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 28]
before message recording
29
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 29]
caller select
30
Pager callback number entry mode is [ 30]
without message
31
being delivered now
[324], [ 31]
32
Busy signal greeting is (message)
[ 32]
33
Busy signal greeting is not recorded
[ 33]
34
Call blocking enabled
[ 34]
Installation Manual
303
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
35
Call screening enabled
[ 35]
36
Call transferred from the voice
processing system
[ 36]
37
CALLBACK NUMBER
[ 37]
38
Caller ID (number)
[ 38], [252]
[ 38], [253]
39
Caller ID number and caller name
deleted
[ 39]
40
Caller ID number entries for this box [ 40]
are full, there are 30 entries for caller
ID allowed
41
Caller ID number is (telephone
number)
[ 41]
[ 41], [647], [392]
42
Caller ID number is not assigned
[ 42]
[ 42], [647], [392]
43
Caller ID numbers assigned
[541], [ 43]
44
Caller ID screen disabled
[ 44]
45
Caller ID screen enabled
[ 45]
46
Caller name is (name)
[ 46]
47
Caller name is erased
[ 47]
48
Caller name is not recorded
[ 48]
49
Calling the operator
[ 49], [417]
50
Cannot be retrieved
[ 50]
51
Class of service number is (number) [ 51], [583]
[ 51], [584]
[ 51]
52
Company greeting number (number) [ 52], [154]
53
Company greeting number is
(number)
[ 53]
54
Company name (name)
[ 54]
55
Company name erased
[ 55]
56
Counts cleared
[ 56]
304
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
57
Covering extension is (extension
number)
[ 57]
58
Covering extension not assigned
[ 58]
59
Covering extension transfer disabled [ 59]
60
Covering extension transfer enabled
[ 60]
61
Custom service menu
[ 61]
[ 61], [154]
62
Custom service number (number)
[ 62]
63
Date is (date)
[ 63]
64
Day mode first operator's extension is [ 64]
(extention number)
65
Day mode first operator's extension is [ 65]
not assigned
66
Day mode second operator's
extension is (extention number)
[ 66]
67
Day mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[ 67]
68
Day mode third operator's extension [ 68]
is (extention number)
69
Day mode third operator's extension [ 69]
is not assigned
70
days
[ 70]
[339], [ 70]
[449], [ 70]
71
DECEMBER
[ 71]
72
Delay time is (time)
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [264]
[ 72], [332]
73
deleted
[289], [ 73]
74
Delivering message to (name)
[ 74]
75
Delivery list number is (number)
[ 75]
76
Department dialling menu erased
[ 76]
77
Department dialling menu is (menu) [ 77]
Installation Manual
305
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
78
Device notification for unreceived
message disabled
[ 78]
79
Device notification for unreceived
message enabled
[ 79]
80
Device number is (number)
[ 80]
81
DIAL TONE
[ 81]
82
digits
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
[121], [822], [ 82]
83
Direct mailbox access disabled
[ 83]
84
Direct mailbox access enabled
[ 84]
85
EIGHT
[ 85]
86
EIGHT [HOUR]
[ 86]
87
EIGHT [MINUTE]
[ 87]
88
EIGHTEEN
[ 88]
89
EIGHTEEN [HOUR]
[ 89]
90
EIGHTEEN [MINUTE]
[ 90]
91
EIGHTEENTH
[ 91]
92
EIGHTH
[ 92]
93
EIGHTY
[ 93]
94
EIGHTY EIGHT
[ 94]
95
EIGHTY FIVE
[ 95]
96
EIGHTY FOUR
[ 96]
97
EIGHTY NINE
[ 97]
98
EIGHTY ONE
[ 98]
99
EIGHTY SEVEN
[ 99]
100
EIGHTY SIX
[100]
101
EIGHTY THREE
[101]
102
EIGHTY TWO
[102]
103
ELEVEN
[103]
104
ELEVEN [HOUR]
[104]
306
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
105
ELEVEN [MINUTE]
[105]
106
ELEVENTH
[106]
107
Enter 1 for AM, or 2 for PM
[107]
108
Enter a class of service number from [108]
1 to 64
109
Enter a group number from 1 to 8
[109]
110
Enter a group number, 1 through 4
[110]
111
Enter a mailbox list number
[111]
112
Enter a message length from 1 to 6
minutes
[112]
113
Enter a message retention time up to [113]
30 days
114
Enter a personal greeting length from [114]
8 to 60 seconds
115
Enter delivery list number 1 or 2
[115]
116
Enter device number, 1 through 3
[116]
117
Enter extension number
[117]
118
Enter question number, followed by
the hash sign
[118]
119
Enter question number, followed by
the pound sign
[119]
120
Enter the 4 digits password
[120], [747]
[120], [746]
121
Enter the caller ID number
[121], [822], [ 82]
122
Enter the caller name announcement [122]
number 1 through 120
123
Enter the company greeting number 1 [123]
through 32
124
Enter the custom service prompt
[124]
number 1 through 100
To record custom service exit prompt,
press 0
125
Enter the day of the month, followed [125]
by the hash sign
Installation Manual
307
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
126
Enter the day of the month, followed [126]
by the pound sign
127
Enter the day, followed by the hash
sign
128
Enter the day, followed by the pound [128]
sign
129
Enter the delay time, followed by the [129]
hash sign
130
Enter the delay time, followed by the [130]
pound sign
131
Enter the destination mailbox number [131], [675]
[131], [674]
132
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the
person's last name
133
Enter the first 4 letters of the owner's [133]
last name
134
Enter the interview mailbox number [134]
135
Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the hash sign
[135]
136
Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the pound sign
[136]
137
Enter the mailbox number
[137]
[137], [812]
[137], [813]
138
Enter the maximum number of caller [138]
IDs for caller name announce Valid
entries are from 0 to 30
139
Enter the maximum number of
messages per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
140
Enter the month, followed by the hash [140], [208]
sign
141
Enter the month, followed by the
pound sign
[141], [208]
142
Enter the new time, followed by the
hash sign
[142], [208]
308
[127]
[132], [198], [199]
[132]
[139]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
143
Enter the new time, followed by the
pound sign
144
Enter the operator's extension number [144]
145
Enter the owner's extension number
[145]
146
Enter the prompt number
[146]
147
Enter the telephone number and wait [147]
To insert a pause or special
command, enter the partial number
and wait for the options menu
148
Enter the time, followed by the hash [148], [208]
sign
[148], [664], [208]
149
Enter the time, followed by the pound [149], [208]
sign
[149], [665], [208]
150
Enter the total message time available [150]
per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes
151
Enter your party's mailbox number
152
Enter your password, followed by the [152]
hash sign
[152], [746]
153
Enter your password, followed by the [153]
pound sign
[153], [747]
154
erased
[ 52], [154]
[ 61], [154]
155
Extension (extention number)
[155]
156
Extension number (extention
number)
[156]
157
External delivery message for (name) [157], [815], [ 24]
158
External delivery message scheduled [158], [379], [ 17]
for (name)
159
External delivery message scheduled [159], [ 17]
on (date)
160
External delivery message will be
sent right away
Installation Manual
[143], [208]
[151], [675]
[151], [674]
[160]
309
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
161
External delivery message will be
sent to (name)
[161], [447]
162
External message delivery disabled
[162]
163
External message delivery enabled
[163]
164
FAX messages
[824], [164]
165
FEBRUARY
[165]
166
FIFTEEN
[166]
167
FIFTEEN [HOUR]
[167]
168
FIFTEEN [MINUTE]
[168]
169
FIFTEENTH
[169]
170
FIFTH
[170]
171
FIFTY
[171]
172
FIFTY [MINUTE]
[172]
173
FIFTY EIGHT
[173]
174
FIFTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[174]
175
FIFTY FIVE
[175]
176
FIFTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[176]
177
FIFTY FOUR
[177]
178
FIFTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[178]
179
FIFTY NINE
[179]
180
FIFTY NINE [MINUTE]
[180]
181
FIFTY ONE
[181]
182
FIFTY ONE [MINUTE]
[182]
183
FIFTY SEVEN
[183]
184
FIFTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[184]
185
FIFTY SIX
[185]
186
FIFTY SIX [MINUTE]
[186]
187
FIFTY THREE
[187]
188
FIFTY THREE [MINUTE]
[188]
189
FIFTY TWO
[189]
310
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
190
FIFTY TWO [MINUTE]
[190]
191
FIRST
[191]
192
First telephone number is (telephone [192]
number)
193
First telephone number is not
assigned
[193]
194
FIVE
[194]
195
FIVE [HOUR]
[195]
196
FIVE [MINUTE]
[196]
197
for
[197]
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
198
For 'Q', press 7
[132], [198], [199]
199
For 'Z', press 9
[132], [198], [199]
200
For a system report, press 5
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
201
For automated attendant status, press [711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
4
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
202
For department dialling, press *
203
For example, to enter 5 o'clock press [203]
5 and the hash sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the hash sign
204
For example, to enter 5 o'clock press [204]
5 and the pound sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the pound sign
205
For example, to enter January, press 1 [205]
and the hash sign
206
For example, to enter January, press 1 [206]
and the pound sign
207
For external message delivery, press [207]
3
Installation Manual
[412], [675], [202]
[412], [674], [202]
311
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
208
For help, press 0
209
For interview mailbox management, [209]
press 1
210
For mailbox management, press 5
211
For notification by telephone, press 1 [211]
For notification by pager, press 2
212
For other features, press 6
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
213
For the next name, press 2
[602], [213], [718], [671]
214
FORTY
[214]
215
FORTY [MINUTE]
[215]
216
FORTY EIGHT
[216]
217
FORTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[217]
218
FORTY FIVE
[218]
219
FORTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[219]
220
FORTY FOUR
[220]
221
FORTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[221]
222
FORTY NINE
[222]
223
FORTY NINE [MINUTE]
[223]
224
FORTY ONE
[224]
225
FORTY ONE [MINUTE]
[225]
226
FORTY SEVEN
[226]
227
FORTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[227]
312
[149], [208]
[149], [665], [208]
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[143], [208]
[141], [208]
[148], [208]
[148], [664], [208]
[142], [208]
[140], [208]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
228
FORTY SIX
[228]
229
FORTY SIX [MINUTE]
[229]
230
FORTY THREE
[230]
231
FORTY THREE [MINUTE]
[231]
232
FORTY TWO
[232]
233
FORTY TWO [MINUTE]
[233]
234
Forwarding mailbox number is
(mailbox number)
[234]
235
Forwarding mailbox number is not
assigned
[235]
236
Forwarding mode is copy
[236]
237
Forwarding mode is move
[237]
238
FOUR
[238]
239
FOUR [HOUR]
[239]
240
FOUR [MINUTE]
[240]
241
FOURTEEN
[241]
242
FOURTEEN [HOUR]
[242]
243
FOURTEEN [MINUTE]
[243]
244
FOURTEENTH
[244]
245
FOURTH
[245]
246
FRIDAY
[246]
247
from (name)
[575], [247]
248
Good afternoon
[248], [819]
[248]
249
Good evening
[249], [819]
[249]
250
Good morning
[250], [819]
[250]
251
Greeting erased
[251]
252
greeting is (message)
[ 38], [252]
253
greeting is not recorded
[ 38], [253]
Installation Manual
313
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
254
Group member deleted
[254]
255
Group name erased
[255]
256
Group name not recorded
[256]
257
Group number (number)
[257]
258
has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
259
has not been received
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
260
HASH(#)
[260]
261
Hello, this is the voice processing
system
[261]
262
(Not available)
263
Hello, this is the voice processing
system Available memory space is
less then 20%
Please erase unnecessary messages
[263]
264
hours (time)
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [264]
265
HUNDRED
[265]
266
I have a call for (name)
[266]
267
I have a call for mailbox (mailbox
number)
[267]
268
I have a message for (name)
[268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
269
I was unable to reach (name)
[269]
270
I'll notify by pager
[270]
271
I'll notify by telephone
[271]
272
I'll redial (number)
[272], [337]
273
I'll redial only once
[273]
274
If you are using a rotary telephone,
stay on the line
[274], [618]
[274]
275
If you want me to call back later,
press 3
[268], [711], [690], [275]
314
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
276
If you would like to hold, press 1
[276], [392]
277
Incorrect entry
[277]
278
Intercom paging disabled
[278]
279
Intercom paging enabled
[279]
280
Intercom paging group number is
(number)
[280]
281
Interview mailbox number is
(mailbox number)
[281]
282
Interview mailbox number is deleted [282]
283
Interview mailbox number is not
assigned
[283]
284
JANUARY
[284]
285
JULY
[285]
286
JUNE
[286]
287
Leaving a message is disabled
[287]
288
Leaving a message is enabled
[288]
289
Mailbox
[289]
[289], [ 73]
290
Mailbox is in use
[290]
291
Mailbox list label erased
[291]
292
Mailbox list number (number)
[292]
293
Mailbox number already specified
[293]
294
MARCH
[294]
295
Maximum number of caller IDs for
caller name announce is (number)
[295]
296
Maximum number of messages per
mailbox is (number)
[296]
297
MAY
[297]
298
Message back up disabled
[298]
299
Message back up enabled
[299]
300
Message cancel for live call screening [300]
disabled
Installation Manual
315
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
301
Message cancel for live call screening [301]
enabled
302
Message delivery cancelled
[302]
303
Message erased
[303]
304
Message for (name)
[304], [432], [ 17]
305
Message from (name)
[305], [816], [ 17]
306
Message from the interview mailbox [306]
307
Message from the message manager [307]
308
Message from the system manager
[308]
309
Message length is (time)
[309], [332]
310
Message Manager
[310]
311
Message notification disabled
[311]
312
Message notification enabled
[312]
313
Message reception mode is interview [313]
mode
314
Message reception mode is message [314]
recording mode
315
Message reception mode is set to
interview mode
[315]
316
Message reception mode is set to
message recording mode
[316]
317
Message recorded by (mailbox
number)
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
318
Message recorded on (date)
[318], [ 17]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
319
Message retrieval order is first-infirst-out
[319]
320
Message retrieval order is last-infirst-out
[320]
321
Message scanning with information
is disabled
[321]
322
Message scanning with information
is enabled
[322]
316
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
323
Message sent on (date)
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
324
Message to (name)
[324], [ 31]
325
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[325], [ 12]
326
Message waiting lamp notification
disabled
[326]
327
Message waiting lamp notification
enabled
[327]
328
Message waiting lamp notification
for unreceived message disabled
[328]
329
Message waiting lamp notification
for unreceived message enabled
[329]
330
Messages
[330]
[824], [330]
331
(number) messages to verify
[331]
332
minutes
[332]
[309], [332]
[763], [332]
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [332]
333
MONDAY
[333]
334
more caller ID numbers
[821], [334]
335
more members
[821], [335]
336
MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED
[336]
337
more times
[272], [337]
338
New message
[338]
339
New message retension time is (day) [339], [ 70]
340
new messages
341
Night mode first operator's extension [341]
is (extention number)
342
Night mode first operator's extension [342]
is not assigned
Installation Manual
[824], [340]
317
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
343
Night mode second operator's
extension is (extention number)
[343]
344
Night mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[344]
345
Night mode third operator's extension [345]
is (extention number)
346
Night mode third operator's extension [346]
is not assigned
347
NINE
[347]
348
NINE [HOUR]
[348]
349
NINE [MINUTE]
[349]
350
NINETEEN
[350]
351
NINETEEN [HOUR]
[351]
352
NINETEEN [MINUTE]
[352]
353
NINETEENTH
[353]
354
NINETY
[354]
355
NINETY EIGHT
[355]
356
NINETY FIVE
[356]
357
NINETY FOUR
[357]
358
NINETY NINE
[358]
359
NINETY ONE
[359]
360
NINETY SEVEN
[360]
361
NINETY SIX
[361]
362
NINETY THREE
[362]
363
NINETY TWO
[363]
364
NINTH
[364]
365
No answer greeting is (message)
[365]
366
No answer greeting is not recorded
[366]
367
No external delivery message
pending
[367]
368
No letters have been specified
[368]
369
No messages to verify
[369]
318
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
370
No more messages
[370]
371
No one specified by this number
[371]
372
No previous message
[372]
373
No question recorded
[373]
374
NOVEMBER
[374]
375
O'CLOCK
[375]
376
OCTOBER
[376]
377
of (company name)
[592], [377]
378
Old message
[378]
379
on (date)
[158], [379], [ 17]
380
ONE
[380]
381
ONE [HOUR]
[381]
382
ONE [MINUTE]
[382]
383
One attempt was busy
[383]
384
One attempt was no answer
[384]
385
One attempt was successful
[385]
386
One message to verify
[386]
387
One other person is queing
[387]
388
Only extension call is available
[499], [388], [415]
389
Operator transfer disabled
[389]
390
Operator transfer enabled
[390]
391
(number) other people are queing
[391]
Installation Manual
319
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
392
Otherwise, press 2
[676], [392]
[697], [392]
[532], [647], [392]
[651], [392]
[276], [392]
[533], [647], [392]
[654], [392]
[720], [392]
[653], [392]
[ 42], [647], [392]
[ 41], [647], [392]
393
Owner's extension is (extention
number)
[393]
394
Owner's extension is not assigned
[394]
395
Owner's extension number is deleted [395]
396
Owner's name erased
[396]
397
Owner's name is (name)
[397]
398
Owner's name is deleted
[398]
399
Owner's name is not recorded
[399]
400
Password deleted
[400]
401
Password entry failure
Check the password
[401]
402
Password is (number)
[402]
403
Password not assigned
[403]
404
PAUSE
[404]
405
Personal greeting for caller ID
disabled
[405]
406
Personal greeting for caller ID
enabled
[406]
407
Personal greeting length is (time)
[407], [454]
408
Play system prompt after personal
greeting disabled
[408]
409
Play system prompt after personal
greeting enabled
[409]
320
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
410
Please call (telephone number)
[410]
411
Please enter your callback number
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
412
Please enter the person's extension
[412], [675]
[412], [675], [202]
[412], [674]
[412],[674],[202]
413
Please enter the person's mailbox
number
[413], [675]
[413], [675], [618]
[413], [674]
[413], [674], [618]
414
Please hold while I page the person
[414]
415
Please inform system manager
[508], [415]
[499], [388], [415]
416
Please leave a message at the tone
[416]
417
Please wait a moment
[417]
[ 49], [417]
418
PM
[418]
419
POUND(#)
[419]
420
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is caller select
[420]
421
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is system
[421]
422
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is user 1
[422]
423
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is user 2
[423]
424
Prompt mode is system
[424]
425
Prompt mode is user 1
[425]
426
Prompt mode is user 2
[426]
427
Prompt number (number)
[427]
428
Prompt restored
[428]
429
PULSE DIALLING MODE
[429]
Installation Manual
321
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
430
Question erased
[430]
431
Question number (number)
[431]
432
received on (date)
[304], [432], [ 17]
433
Record caller name at the tone
[433]
434
Record company name at the tone
[434]
435
Record greeting at the tone
[435]
436
Record label at the tone
[436]
437
Record menu at the tone
[437]
438
Record owner's name at the tone
[438]
439
Record the group name at the tone
[439]
440
Record the prompt at the tone
[440]
441
Record the question at the tone
[441]
442
Record the recipient's name at the
tone
[442]
443
Record your name at the tone
[443]
444
Recording accepted
[444]
445
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service disabled
[445]
446
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service enabled
[446]
447
right away
[161], [447]
448
SATURDAY
[448]
449
Saved message retention time is (day) [449], [ 70]
450
Saved message retention time is
unlimited
[450]
451
SECOND
[451]
452
Second telephone number is
(telephone number)
[452]
453
Second telephone number is not
assigned
[453]
322
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
454
seconds
[454]
[ 14], [454]
[407], [454]
455
Selection Menu
[455]
456
Selection menu erased
[456]
457
Selection menu is (selection menu)
[457]
458
Sending report now to terminal or
printer connected to RS-232 port
[458]
459
SEPTEMBER
[459]
460
Set the answer length using the
following options
For 4 seconds, press 1
For 8 seconds, press 2
For 16 seconds, press 3
For 32 seconds, press 4
[460]
461
SEVEN
[461]
462
SEVEN [HOUR]
[462]
463
SEVEN [MINUTE]
[463]
464
SEVENTEEN
[464]
465
SEVENTEEN [HOUR]
[465]
466
SEVENTEEN [MINUTE]
[466]
467
SEVENTEENTH
[467]
468
SEVENTH
[468]
469
SEVENTY
[469]
470
SEVENTY EIGHT
[470]
471
SEVENTY FIVE
[471]
472
SEVENTY FOUR
[472]
473
SEVENTY NINE
[473]
474
SEVENTY ONE
[474]
475
SEVENTY SEVEN
[475]
476
SEVENTY SIX
[476]
477
SEVENTY THREE
[477]
Installation Manual
323
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
478
SEVENTY TWO
[478]
479
SIX
[479]
480
SIX [HOUR]
[480]
481
SIX [MINUTE]
[481]
482
SIXTEEN
[482]
483
SIXTEEN [HOUR]
[483]
484
SIXTEEN [MINUTE]
[484]
485
SIXTEENTH
[485]
486
SIXTH
[486]
487
SIXTY
[487]
488
SIXTY EIGHT
[488]
489
SIXTY FIVE
[489]
490
SIXTY FOUR
[490]
491
SIXTY NINE
[491]
492
SIXTY ONE
[492]
493
SIXTY SEVEN
[493]
494
SIXTY SIX
[494]
495
SIXTY THREE
[495]
496
SIXTY TWO
[496]
497
Sorry
[497]
498
Sorry, I cannot add any more
[498]
499
Sorry, I cannot call this number
[499], [388], [415]
500
Sorry, mailbox in use, cannot be
deleted
[500]
501
Sorry, maximum of 20 destinations
exceeded
[501]
502
Sorry, no one is available to answer
the call
[502]
503
Sorry, no space for recording
[503]
504
Sorry, Operator is not available to
answer the call
Please call back later
[504]
324
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
505
Sorry, there are no more matching
names
506
Sorry, there is no space for recording [506]
507
Sorry, there is no space for recording [507]
in this mailbox
508
Sorry, this function is not available
[508], [415]
[508]
509
Sorry, this group is full
[509], [ 2]
[509], [ 1]
510
Sorry, this line is busy
[510]
511
Sorry, this list is in use for delivery If [511]
this list is edited, all the deliveries
will then be cancelled
512
Sorry, this mailbox is in use
[512]
513
Sorry, this name cannot be found
[513]
514
Sorry, this number is not assigned
[514]
515
Sorry, this pager is not available
[515]
516
Sorry, this report is not available
[516]
517
Sorry, you cannot deliver the message [517]
The maximum number of delivery
has already been reached
518
Sorry, you cannot reply
[518], [538]
[518], [593]
[518], [589]
519
Sorry, you cannot transfer a private
message
[519]
520
STAR( )
[520]
521
State your comment at the tone
[521], [669], [702]
522
SUNDAY
[522]
523
Telephone number deleted
[523]
524
Telephone number is (telephone
number)
[524]
525
Telephone number is not assigned
[525]
Installation Manual
[505]
[505], [756]
325
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
526
TEN
[526]
527
TEN [HOUR]
[527]
528
TEN [MINUTE]
[528]
529
TENTH
[529]
530
Thank you
[530]
531
Thank you for calling
[531]
532
The callback number is (telephone
number)
[532], [647], [392]
533
The callback number is not assigned [533], [647], [392]
534
The FAX transfer situation is as
follows
[534]
535
The first 4 letters of the owner's last
name are (name)
[535]
536
Mailbox number entry failure
Check the mailbox number
[536]
537
The message is (message)
[537]
538
The message sender is unknown
[518], [538]
539
The prompt is now turned off mode
[539]
540
The system-reserved mailbox cannot [540]
be edited
541
There are (number)
[541], [ 43]
542
There are no messages
[542]
543
There was 1 unsuccessful attempt to [543]
enter this mailbox
544
There were (number of failure)
545
These are the brief segments of your [545]
Message
546
THIRD
547
Third telephone number is (telephone [547]
number)
548
Third telephone number is not
assigned
[548]
549
THIRTEEN
[549]
326
[544], [809]
[546]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
550
THIRTEEN [HOUR]
[550]
551
THIRTEEN [MINUTE]
[551]
552
THIRTEENTH
[552]
553
THIRTIETH
[553]
554
THIRTY
[554]
555
THIRTY [MINUTE]
[555]
556
THIRTY EIGHT
[556]
557
THIRTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[557]
558
THIRTY FIRST
[558]
559
THIRTY FIVE
[559]
560
THIRTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[560]
561
THIRTY FOUR
[561]
562
THIRTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[562]
563
THIRTY NINE
[563]
564
THIRTY NINE [MINUTE]
[564]
565
THIRTY ONE
[565]
566
THIRTY ONE [MINUTE]
[566]
567
THIRTY SEVEN
[567]
568
THIRTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[568]
569
THIRTY SIX
[569]
570
THIRTY SIX [MINUTE]
[570]
571
THIRTY THREE
[571]
572
THIRTY THREE [MINUTE]
[572]
573
THIRTY TWO
[573]
574
THIRTY TWO [MINUTE]
[574]
575
This call is for (name)
[575]
[575], [247]
576
This call is from (name)
[576]
577
This caller ID number already exists [577]
578
This device is for continuous use
Installation Manual
[578]
327
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
579
This device is for scheduled use
[579]
580
This device is not to be used
[580]
581
This group has no members
[581]
582
This is a new mailbox
[582]
583
This is for message manager
[ 51], [583]
584
This is for system manager
[ 51], [584]
585
This is the General Delivery Mailbox [585]
586
This is the last message
[586]
587
This is the last prompt number
[587]
588
This is your mailbox
[588]
589
This is your message
[518], [589]
590
This list member already exists
[590]
591
This mailbox number is already
assigned
[591]
592
This message is from (name)
[592], [377]
[592]
593
This message is from the general
delivery mailbox
[518], [593]
594
This message will be delivered on
(day)
[594], [ 17]
595
THREE
[595]
596
THREE [HOUR]
[596]
597
THREE [MINUTE]
[597]
598
THURSDAY
[598]
599
Time is (time)
[599]
600
times
[764], [600]
601
To accept the prompt, press 2
[732], [601], [678], [677]
602
To accept, press 1
[602], [213], [718], [671]
328
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
603
To accept, press 2
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[738], [603]
[647], [603]
[732], [603], [678]
[639], [603], [733]
[647], [603], [661]
[647], [603], [682]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [721]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
604
To accept, press 4
[759], [760], [761], [604]
605
To accept, press 5
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
606
To add group members, press 2
[626], [606]
[626], [606], [656], [731]
607
To add more caller ID numbers, press [607]
2 or press 1 to end
608
To add more digits, press 4
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
609
To add more members, press 1
To end, press 2
[609]
610
To add new mailbox number, press 3 [755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
611
To add new member, press 1
[611]
[611], [657], [733]
612
To add, press 1
[612]
[612], [660], [733]
613
To add, press 2
[647], [613]
614
To add, press 4
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
Installation Manual
329
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
615
To answer the call, press 1
Otherwise, press 2 and hang up
616
To assign or edit mailboxes, press 1 [616]
To delete mailboxes, press 2
To reset mailbox passwords, press 3
617
To call message sender, press 1
To record a message, press 2
[617]
618
To call the operator, press 0
[274], [618]
[413], [675], [618]
[618]
[413], [674], [618]
619
To call this person, press 1
[619], [645], [756]
620
To cancel , press
To continue, press 1
[620]
621
To cancel external message delivery, [621], [642]
press 1
622
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I'll try your party again
[622]
623
To cancel mailing list review, press
any key
[623]
624
To cancel this message or
verification, press 3
[624]
625
To change caller ID greeting number [625]
1, press 1 To change caller ID
greeting number 2, press 2 To change
caller ID greeting number 3, press 3
To change caller ID greeting number
4, press 4
626
To change group name, press 1
627
To change the answer length, press 1 [627], [748], [749], [689]
628
To change the caller name and
number, press 5
330
[615]
[626], [606]
[626], [606], [656], [731]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
629
[629]
To change the department dialling
menu, press 3
To change the custom service menu,
press 4
To change the voice label, press 5
To modify the user prompt, press 6
To change the selection menu, press 7
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
630
To change the first telephone number, [630]
press 1
To change the second telephone
number, press 2
To change the third telephone
number, press 3
631
To change the message waiting lamp [631]
status, press 1
To change the device status, press 2
To assign the telephone or pager
numbers, press 3
632
To change the no answer greeting,
press 1
To change the busy signal greeting,
press 2
To change the after hours greeting,
press 3
633
[633]
To change the no answer greeting,
press 1 To change the busy signal
greeting, press 2 To change the after
hours greeting, press 3 To change the
caller ID greetings, press 4
634
To change the owner's name, press 3 [637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
635
To change the password, press 1
[635], [642]
636
To change the password, press 2
[641], [636], [638], [643]
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
637
To change the personal greeting,
press 1
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
Installation Manual
[632]
331
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
638
To change the recipient's name, press [641], [636], [638], [643]
3
639
To change the setting, press 1
640
To change the specified prompt, press [640]
1
To change all prompts, press 2
641
To change the telephone number,
press 1
642
To change the time and date, press 2 [635], [642]
[621], [642]
643
To change the time and date, press 4 [641], [636], [638], [643]
644
To change this question, press 1
645
To change to the next person, press 2 [619], [645], [756]
646
To change user prompt 1, press 1
To change user prompt 2, press 2
[646]
647
To change, press 1
[647], [603]
[532], [647], [392]
[533], [647], [392]
[647], [603], [661]
[647], [603], [682]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [613]
[647], [603], [721]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[ 42], [647], [392]
[ 41], [647], [392]
[647], [750], [757]
648
To check the mailbox distribution,
press 3
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
649
To check the mailbox distribution,
press 4
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
332
[639], [603], [733]
[641], [636], [638], [643]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
650
To clear all mailbox usage counts,
press 2
[751], [650]
651
To continue holding, press 1
[651], [392]
652
To customise your mailbox, press 3
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
653
To delete all caller ID numbers, press [653], [392]
1
654
To delete all group members, press 1 [654], [392]
655
To delete distribution verification of [655]
this message, press 1
To cancel message delivery, press 2
656
To delete group members, press 3
[626], [606], [656], [731]
657
To delete members, press 2
[611], [657], [733]
658
To delete the password, press 1
[658], [694]
659
To delete, press 1
[659], [708]
[659], [705]
[659], [694]
660
To delete, press 2
[612], [660], [733]
661
To delete, press 3
[647], [603], [661]
662
To deliver a broadcast message, press [662], [663]
1
663
To deliver a message, press 2
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
[662], [663]
664
To deliver now, press only the hash
sign
[148], [664], [208]
665
To deliver now, press only the pound [149], [665], [208]
sign
666
[666]
To enable call blocking, press 1
To enable call screening, press 2
To enable intercom paging, press 3
To enable pager access, press 4
To disable all transfer service, press 5
Installation Manual
333
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
667
Modifiable Prompts
To end recording, hang up
To cancel your message, press
you have a touch tone phone
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
[667]
, if
668
To end recording, hang up or press 1 [668], [702]
for more features
669
To end recording, press 1
[669], [702]
[669]
[521], [669], [702]
670
To end this call, press
[717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[720], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
671
To enter a new name or mailbox,
press
[602], [213], [718], [671]
672
To enter another extension, press
[672]
673
To enter another extension, press 2
[695], [673]
674
To enter by name, press the hash sign [413], [674]
and 1
[413], [674], [618]
[412], [674]
[412], [674], [202]
[151], [674]
[131], [674]
675
To enter by name, press the pound
sign and 1
676
To enter your callback number, press [676], [392]
1
677
To erase and exit, press
334
[413], [675]
[413], [675], [618]
[412], [675]
[412], [675], [202]
[151], [675]
[131], [675]
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
678
To erase and try again, press 3
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
[732], [603], [678]
679
To erase this message, press 3
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
680
To erase this prompt and use system [714], [680], [757]
prompt, press 2
681
To erase this question, press 1
[681], [748], [749], [689]
682
To erase, press 3
[647], [603], [682]
683
To fast forward, press 6
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
684
To generate fax call report, press 1
To clear fax call counts, press 2
[685]
685
To generate memory usage report,
[684]
press 1.
To clear memory usage counts, press
2.
686
To generate mailbox usage report,
[686]
press 1
To clear mailbox usage counts, press
2
687
To generate port usage report, press 1 [687]
To clear port usage counts, press 2
Installation Manual
335
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
688
[688]
To generate system service report,
press 1
For memory usage report
management, press 2
For port usage report management,
press 3
For mailbox usage report
management, press 4
To generate mailbox parameter
report, press 5
To generate call account report, press
6
To generate class of service
parameter report, press 7
To generate fax call report, press 8
689
To go directly to a question, press 4
[627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
690
To hold this call, press 2
[268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
691
To insert a pager display command,
press 8
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
692
To insert a pause, press 5
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
693
To insert a wait for dial tone, press 7 [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
694
To keep, press 2
[659], [694]
[658], [694]
695
To leave a message, press 1
[695]
[695], [673]
336
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
696
To let the caller select prompt
language, press 4
697
To make this message private, press 1 [697], [392]
698
To message scan, press 8
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
699
To modify message, press 5
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
700
To notify the person by pager, press 4 [700]
701
To page your party, press 3
702
To pause and restart recording, press [669], [702]
2
[668], [702]
[702]
[521], [669], [702]
703
To play the entire message, press 3
704
To play the message, press 1
[704]
To check the previous message, press
1 twice
To check the next message, press 2
705
To play the next caller ID number,
press 2
[659], [705]
706
To play the next message, press 2
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[723], [706], [703]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[724], [706]
[706]
707
To play the next schedule, press 2
[728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
708
To play the next, press 2
[659], [708]
709
To play the previous schedule, press 4 [728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
Installation Manual
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
[701]
[723], [706], [703]
337
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
710
To reach the covering extension,
press 2
[710]
711
To receive the message, press 1
[268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
712
To record a message for external
delivery, press 1
To check external delivery message
status, press 2
To set up mailing list, press 3
[712]
713
To record a message, press 1
[713]
To add new mailbox number, press 2
To review the mailing list, press 3
714
To record a new prompt, press 1
[714], [680], [757]
715
To record the question, press 1
To set the answer length, press 2
To erase the question, press 3
[715]
716
To record, press 1
To erase, press 2
[716]
717
To repeat this message, press 1
[717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
718
To repeat this name, press 3
[602], [213], [718], [671]
719
To repeat this schedule, press 3
[728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
720
To repeat, press 1
[720], [670]
[720], [392]
721
To repeat, press 3
[647], [603], [721]
338
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
722
To replay the previous message
information, press 1
To play the next message's
information, press 2
To play the message, press 3
723
To replay the previous message, press [723], [706], [703]
1
724
To replay the previous message, press [717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
1 twice
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[724], [706]
[724]
725
To reply, press 2
[717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
726
To reply, press 4
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
727
To report all mailbox usage, press 2
[751], [727]
728
To reschedule, press 1
[728], [707], [719], [709]
729
To retrieve the call, press 2
[729]
730
To review the mailing list, press 4
[755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
731
To review this group, press 4
[626], [606], [656], [731]
732
To review, press 1
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
[732], [603], [678]
733
To review, press 3
[611], [657], [733]
[639], [603], [733]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[612], [660], [733]
Installation Manual
[722]
339
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
734
To rewind, press 5
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
735
To select caller select mode, press 1
To select without message mode,
press 2
To select before message recording
mode, press 3
To select after message recording
mode, press 4
To disable all entry modes, press 5
To accept, press 6
[735]
736
To send to 1 recipient, press 1
To send by mailing list, press 2
[736]
737
[737]
To set call transfer status, press 1
To set up covering extension, press 2
To set message reception mode, press
3
To set incomplete handling status,
press 4
738
To set delivery time or make this
message private, press 1
[738], [603]
739
To set delivery time, press 1
For immediate delivery, press 2
[739]
740
To set dial mode, press 6
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
741
To set leaving a message status, press [741]
1
To set covering extension transfer
status, press 2
To set intercom paging status, press 3
To set pager access status, press 4
To set operator transfer status, press 5
To set returning to top menu
automated attendant service status,
press 6
742
To set the clock, press 4
340
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
743
To set the group distribution lists,
press 4
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
744
To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
[744]
745
To set up message waiting
notification, press 2
[745]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
746
To skip setting the password, press
the hash sign
[120], [746]
[152], [746]
747
To skip setting the password, press
the pound sign
[120], [747]
[153], [747]
748
To skip to the next question, press 2
[627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
749
To skip to the previous question,
press 3
[627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
750
To skip, press 2
[647], [750], [757]
751
To specify the mailbox range, press 1 [751], [727]
[751], [650]
752
To transfer General Delivery
Mailbox messages, press 1
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
753
To transfer this message, press 7
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
754
To transfer with comment, press 2
[755], [754], [610], [730]
755
To transfer, press 1
[755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
756
To try again, press
[619], [645], [756]
[505], [756]
Installation Manual
341
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
757
To turn off the prompt, press 3
[647], [750], [757]
[714], [680], [757]
758
To schedule, press 1
To use continuously, press 2
To not use, press 3
[758]
759
To use the system prompt, press 1
[759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
760
To use user 1 prompt, press 2
[759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
761
To use user 2 prompt, press 3
[759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
762
TONE DIALLING MODE
[762]
763
Total message time available per
mailbox is (time)
[763], [332]
764
Transfered (number)
[764], [600]
765
Transfered 1 time
[765]
766
TUESDAY
[766]
767
TWELFTH
[767]
768
TWELVE
[768]
769
TWELVE [HOUR]
[769]
770
TWELVE [MINUTE]
[770]
771
TWENTY
[771]
772
TWENTY [HOUR]
[772]
773
TWENTY [MINUTE]
[773]
774
TWENTY EIGHT
[774]
775
TWENTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[775]
776
TWENTY EIGHTH
[776]
777
TWENTY FIFTH
[777]
778
TWENTY FIRST
[778]
779
TWENTY FIVE
[779]
780
TWENTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[780]
781
TWENTY FOUR
[781]
342
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
782
TWENTY FOUR [HOUR]
[782]
783
TWENTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[783]
784
TWENTY FOURTH
[784]
785
TWENTY NINE
[785]
786
TWENTY NINE [MINUTE]
[786]
787
TWENTY NINTH
[787]
788
TWENTY ONE
[788]
789
TWENTY ONE [HOUR]
[789]
790
TWENTY ONE [MINUTE]
[790]
791
TWENTY SECOND
[791]
792
TWENTY SEVEN
[792]
793
TWENTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[793]
794
TWENTY SEVENTH
[794]
795
TWENTY SIX
[795]
796
TWENTY SIX [MINUTE]
[796]
797
TWENTY SIXTH
[797]
798
TWENTY THIRD
[798]
799
TWENTY THREE
[799]
800
TWENTY THREE [HOUR]
[800]
801
TWENTY THREE [MINUTE]
[801]
802
TWENTY TWO
[802]
803
TWENTY TWO [HOUR]
[803]
804
TWENTY TWO [MINUTE]
[804]
805
TWENTIETH
[805]
806
TWO
[806]
807
TWO [HOUR]
[807]
808
TWO [MINUTE]
[808]
809
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
[544], [809]
810
Use call waiting on busy signal
disabled
[810]
Installation Manual
343
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
811
Use call waiting on busy signal
enabled
812
Use the hash sign key as a wild card [137], [812]
character
813
Use the pound sign key as a wild card [137], [813]
character
814
Verification deleted
[814]
815
was erased
[157], [815], [ 24]
816
was sent on (date)
[305], [816], [ 17]
817
WEDNESDAY
[817]
818
Welcome to the general delivery
mailbox
[818]
819
Welcome to the Voice Processing
System
[250], [819]
[248], [819]
[249], [819]
[819]
820
When you are finished hang up, or
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
stay on the line to confirm or change
your number
821
You can add up to (number)
[821], [335]
[821], [334]
822
You can enter up to (number)
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
[121], [822], [ 82]
823
You can not add any more digits
[823]
824
You have (number)
[824], [340]
[824], [330]
[824], [164]
825
You have a call
[825]
826
You have a call from (name)
[826]
827
You have 1 FAX message
[827]
828
You have 1 message
[828]
829
You have 1 new message
[829]
344
[811]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
830
ZERO
831
Break mode first operator's extension [831]
is (extension number)
832
Break mode first operator's extension [832]
is not assigned
833
Break mode second operator's
extension is (extension number)
[833]
834
Break mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[834]
835
Break mode third operator's
extension is (extension number)
[835]
836
Break mode third operator's
extension is not assigned
[836]
837
Lunch mode first operator's extension [837]
is (extension number)
838
Lunch mode first operator's extension [838]
is not assigned
839
Lunch mode second operator's
extension is (extension number)
[839]
840
Lunch mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[840]
841
Lunch mode third operator's
extension is (extension number)
[841]
842
Lunch mode third operator's
extension is not assigned
[842]
843
[843]
To change the company greeting,
press 1
To change the company name, press 2
To change the department dialling
menu, press 3
To change the custom service menu,
press 4
To change the voice label, press 5
To modify the user prompt, press 6
To change the selection menu, press 7
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
Installation Manual
[830]
345
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
844
Enter a class of service number from [844]
1 to 62
845
THOUSAND
[845]
846
Enter a message length from 1 to 6
minutes or 0 for unlimited length
[846]
847
Enter the total message time available [847]
per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes or 0 for unlimited time
848
To set station call forwarding, press 4 [848]
849
To forward all calls, press 1
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
850
To forward busy calls, press 2
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
851
To forward no answer calls, press 3
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
852
To forward busy or no answer calls,
press 4
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
853
To forward to a CO line, press 5
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
854
To cancel call forwarding, press 6
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
855
Enter the destination extension
number for forwarding
[855]
856
Your extension is call forwarded all [856]
calls to extension (extension number)
857
Your extension is call forwarded busy [857]
calls to extension (extension number)
858
Your extension is call forwarded no
answer calls to extension (extension
number)
859
Your extension is call forwarded busy [859]
or no answer calls to extension
(extension number)
860
Call forwarding accepted
346
[858]
[860]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
861
Call forwarding not accepted
[861]
Please check the destination number
862
To forward to your Telephone
number 1, press 1
[862]
863
To forward to your Telephone
number 2, press 2
[863]
864
To forward to the other number, press [864]
3
865
Enter the destination telephone
number for forwarding
[865], [822], [ 82]
866
Your extension is call forwarded to
telephone number (telephone
number)
[866]
867
Call forwarding is cancelled
[867]
868
To set station call forwarding, press 6 [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
869
To change Remote Call Forwarding
to CO setting, press 6
870
To change Telephone number 1, press [870]
1
To change Telephone number 2, press
2
871
Telephone number 1 is not assigned
[871]
872
Telephone number 1 is (telephone
number)
[872]
873
Telephone number 2 is not assigned
[873]
874
Telephone number 2 is (telephone
number)
[874]
875
Enter the telephone number
[875], [822], [ 82]
876
Telephone number 1 for Remote Call [876]
Forward to CO is not assigned
877
Telephone number 1 for Remote Call [877]
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
878
Telephone number 2 for Remote Call [878]
Forward to CO is not assigned
879
Telephone number 2 for Remote Call [879]
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
Installation Manual
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
347
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
880
Message length is unlimited
[880]
881
Total message time available per
mailbox is unlimited
[881]
882
Remote Call Forward to CO disabled [882]
883
Remote Call Forward to CO enabled [883]
884
Delete message confirmation
disabled
885
Delete message confirmation enabled [885]
886
[886]
To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting, press
4
To change company greeting setting,
press 5
887
To set up mailbox, press 1
[887]
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting, press
4
888
For port setting, press 1
For trunk setting, press 2
[888]
889
Enter the port number
[889], [890]
890
from 1 to (number)
[889], [890]
[892], [890]
891
Port number is (number)
[891]
892
Enter the trunk group number
[892], [890]
893
Trunk group number is (number)
[893]
894
For Day time, press 1
For Night time, press 2
For Lunch time, press 3
For Break time, press 4
[894]
895
Current company greeting setting is
number (number)
[895]
896
Current company greeting setting is
System Greeting
[896]
348
[884]
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
897
Current company greeting setting is
disabled
898
To change company greeting number, [898]
press 1
To set system greeting, press 2
To disable, press 3
899
If you really want to erase, press 1
If not, press 2
[899]
900
To set Automatic mode, press 1
To set Manual Day mode, press 2
To set Manual Night mode, press 3
To set Manual Lunch mode, press 4
To set Manual Break mode, press 5
To set PBX Control mode, press 6
[900]
901
Current service mode is Automatic
mode
[901]
902
Current service mode is Manual Day [902]
mode
903
Current service mode is Manual
Night mode
[903]
904
Current service mode is Manual
Lunch mode
[904]
905
Current service mode is Manual
Break mode
[905]
906
Current service mode is PBX Control [906]
mode
907
To change, press 2
[612], [907], [661], [908]
908
To review, press 4
[612], [907], [661], [908]
909
To change caller ID number, press 1 [909]
To change caller name, press 2
To accept, press 3
910
All caller ID numbers deleted
[910]
911
To turn on the prompt, press 3
[647], [750], [911]
[714], [680], [911]
912
The prompt is now turned on
[912]
Installation Manual
[897]
349
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Table 81
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
913
Enter a message retention time up to [913]
30 days or 0 for unlimited days
914
Enter a group number from 1 to 17
[914]
[Linked Prompts List]
Subscriber Service
Table 82
[824]
You have (number)
[544]
There were (number of failure)
[338]
new message
[809]
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
350
Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Receive Message
Table 83
[317]
Message recorded by (mailbox number) [325]
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[ 13]
and transferred via (mailbox number)
[ 12]
and (mailbox number)
[ 12]
and (mailbox number)
[318]
Message recorded on (date)
[824]
You have (number)
[ 17]
at (time)
[330]
Messages
Message Scan
Table 84
[305]
Message from (name)
[816]
was sent on (date)
[ 17]
at (time)
Message Delivery
Table 85
[594]
This message will be delivered on (day)
[ 17]
at (time)
Personal Group Distribution List
Table 86
[821]
You can add up to (number)
[335]
more members
Check Mailbox Distribution
Table 87
[304]
Message for (name)
[323]
Message sent on (date)
[432]
received on (date)
[ 17]
at (time)
[ 17]
at (time)
[197]
for (mailbox number)
[197]
for (mailbox number)
[258]
has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[259]
has not been received
Installation Manual
351
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
External Message Delivery
Table 88
[158]
External delivery message scheduled for [592]
(name)
This message is from (name)
[379]
on (date)
[377]
of (company name)
[ 17]
at (time)
[157]
External delivery message for (name)
[161]
External delivery message will be sent to [815]
(name)
was erased
[447]
right away
[ 24]
because message retention time expired
[324]
Message to (name)
[272]
I'll redial (number)
[ 31]
being delivered now
[337]
more times
Message Waiting Notification
Table 89
[411]
Please enter your callback number
[411]
Please enter your callback number
[822]
You can enter up to (number)
[822]
You can enter up to (number)
[ 82]
digits
[ 82]
digits
[820]
When you are finished hang up, stay on
the line to confirm or change your
number
[575]
This call is for (name)
[247]
from (name)
Interview Mailbox Management
Table 90
[ 14]
Answer length is (number)
[454]
seconds
Fax Management
Table 91
[824]
You have (number)
[764]
Transferred (number)
[164]
FAX messages
[600]
times
352
Installation Manual
Glossary
Glossary
Alternate Extension Group
Transfers calls to the extensions in this group following the sequence specified by
"Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence".
APT Integration
Digital Integration between the KX-TA series and the VPS.
Auto Configuration
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS can automatically draw information
from the KX-TA series, the KX-TD612, the KX-TD816 or the KX-TD1232. This
information includes, among other things, extension number assignments for each VPS
port. This saves time in the initial setup. Auto Configuration can be executed by DIP Switch
settings or by System Administration (Quick Setup).
Auto Forwarding
Allows un-retrieved messages to be copied or moved to another mailbox.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant feature of the VPS requests the caller to enter an extension
number and then the VPS dials the number. If there is no answer or the line is busy, the
caller is given some options, including the option to leave a message in a mailbox. This is
the advantage of calling an extension indirectly through the Automated Attendant rather
than calling it directly.
Call Blocking
Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the
subscriber's extension.
Call Screening
Allows subscribers to screen calls. The VPS prompts the caller with the message "Record
your name at the tone", and records the caller's name; it then puts the caller on hold while
playing the name to the subscriber who decides whether to take the call or not.
Call Transfer
Transfers a call to the requested destination.
Installation Manual
353
Glossary
Called Party ID
(Sometimes referred to as Follow-On ID) Allows the PBX to dial extra digits to bring the
caller directly to a specified mailbox, rather than to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Caller ID Call Routing
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS automatically sends calls from preassigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension, mailbox (including System Group
Distribution List) or Custom Service.
Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal)
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS announces pre-recorded Caller ID
callers' names when: (1) extension users listen to messages from pre-assigned numbers left
in the users' mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls from pre-assigned numbers to the users
(Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the users by intercom (Intercom Paging).
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name
announcements, the VPS will use the personal caller name.
Company Greeting
Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet callers. One (or System Greeting or
none) can be selected for each Day, Night, Lunch, Break, and Holiday service on a port
basis and trunk (outside line) basis.
Company Name
This is played by the VPS to the intended receiver of an External Delivery Message when
he does not enter the password (if required) correctly. This helps him to realise where the
call came from.
Covering Extension
This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service. This can also be accessed
by pressing [0] while a Personal Greeting is being played, or while a caller is leaving a
message.
Custom Service Setting
Allows one-touch access to extensions, other custom service menus, fax machine,
mailboxes, etc. A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal
directions to the non-subscribers.
Default Setting
A parameter defined for the system at the factory which can be changed through system
programming by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
354
Installation Manual
Glossary
Delayed Ringing
There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications:
(1) The VPS is used as the no-answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature of your
PBX.
(2) DIL 1:N (outside [CO] line to several extensions) terminates on telephones and VPS
ports. To give the telephone users a chance to answer calls, the VPS lines should be
programmed for delayed ringing. Otherwise, the VPS will answer the calls immediately.
Delete Message Confirmation
The VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before erasing a message left in
the mailbox.
Delivery Time
The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a pre-recorded message. You
can specify delivery time in External Delivery Message or when delivering a message to
other subscribers (Subscriber's Guide Section 3.1)
Department Dialling
A speed-dialling feature that permits an outside caller to dial a single digit (1-9) to reach a
specific extension.
Direct Mailbox Access
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can enter his mailbox directly
when he calls the VPS from his extension. He does not have to enter any special codes
except for his password, if one is set.
DPT Integration
Digital integration between the VPS and the KX-TD612, KX-TD816 or the KX-TD1232.
Requires upgraded software in the PBX.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may not
be able to utilise some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, consult your dealer.
DTMF
(Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Commonly referred to as touchtone.
External Call Forwarding
(Available on the KX-TD816 and the KX-TD1232.) Forwards calls to an extension that has
call forwarding activated to an outside phone.
External Delivery Message
A message intended for automatic delivery to outside parties and/or extensions.
The message can be delivered immediately or at a specified time.
Installation Manual
355
Glossary
External Message Delivery List
Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to outside parties. Each list can
have 8 destinations.
External Message Delivery Redial
Allows the System Administrator to instruct the VPS when making external message
deliveries how many attempts to make when the line is busy or when there is no answer.
Fast Forward
Puts the user 4 seconds ahead in the current message.
Follow-On ID
See Called Party ID.
General Delivery Mailbox
When the caller does not dial anything (either because he does not want to or he is using a
rotary telephone), the VPS sends him to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Periodically (daily is best), the Message Manager should transfer the contents of the
General Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations.
Hash Sign
Same as Pound Sign.
HELP
One of the utility commands that is used to list all utility commands with a brief description
of each.
Immediate Reply
Allows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the extension number
or the mailbox number of the sender.
Inband Signalling
The Follow-On ID (or Called Party ID) that integrates the VPS and the PBX. Uses intercom
paths to light the message waiting light. Does not give "high end" features such as: Intercom
Paging, Direct Mailbox Access, Live Call Screening, etc.
356
Installation Manual
Glossary
Incomplete Call Handling Service
Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy.
There are 6 options for the Incomplete Call Handling Service:
(1) to record a message from the caller,
(2) transfer the caller to a covering extension,
(3) page the mailbox owner via the PBX,
(4) notify the mailbox owner via beeper (pager),
(5) transfer the caller to the operator, or
(6) let the caller try another extension.
Integration
Required between the VPS and the PBX. See Inband Signalling, APT Integration and DPT
Integration.
Intercept Routing No Answer
Transfers an unanswered call to another extension, or to the VPS.
(This is a PBX feature.)
Intercom Paging
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows up to 8 different paging groups. An
outside party can reach a subscriber who is away from her telephone using either internal
or external paging groups. For a Caller ID caller, if her name has been recorded for the
Caller Name Announcement feature, the name will be announced at the end of the page.
Interview Service
A special type of subscriber mailbox that enables the subscriber to record up to 10
questions. After the answers are recorded, the Message Waiting Lamp turns on at the
subscriber's telephone. (Good for claims departments, order desks, job applications, etc.)
Keypad
All touchtone keys on the telephone.
LCD
Liquid crystal display
Live Call Screening
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The proprietary telephone works like an
answering machine. The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone or the
handset while the message is being recorded.
LOAD
One of the utility commands that is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from a
personal computer.
Installation Manual
357
Glossary
Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)
An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox. This feature is used by
subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone.
Mailbox Capacity (messages)
The number of messages that can be recorded in a subscriber's mailbox: should be set
between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Mailbox Capacity (recording time)
The total length of time for messages in a subscriber's mailbox: should be set between 5 and
100 min or unlimited length by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Mailbox Extension
Normally the same number as the telephone extension number.
Mailbox Management
Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes.
Menu
A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or the keys
from a personal computer.
Message Manager
(Mailbox 98, 998, 9998, or 99998) The person who takes care of the General Delivery
Mailbox and records: the Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialling
Menu, Custom Service Menus, Voice Labels, User Prompts (User 1/User 2), Multilingual
Selection Menu, and System Caller Names.
Message Retention Time
New Message Retention Time—the length of time the VPS will store a new (unplayed)
message before deleting the message.
Saved Message Retention Time—the length of time the VPS will store an old (played)
message before deleting the message.
Message Retrieval Order
The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages: Last In First Out (LIFO) or First In
First Out (FIFO).
Message Transfer
Allows a subscriber to re-route a message to another mailbox unless the message was
marked "private". Additional comments can be added to this message.
358
Installation Manual
Glossary
Message Waiting Lamp
Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox.
Message Waiting Notification
The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have received
messages (if authorised by the System Administrator or the System Manager). There are 3
notification methods: (1) by the Message Waiting Lamp, (2) by a telephone, or (3) by a
beeper (pager).
Multilingual Selection Menu
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this menu. Allows callers to choose the
language they want (System, User 1 or User 2 prompts) when they call the VPS.
Non-Subscriber
A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox.
Notification Method
(See Message Waiting Notification.)
Operator
Up to three destinations can be assigned as operators. This is the extension that receives
calls when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials [0].
Owner's Name
After a subscriber records his name, the VPS announces his name during transfers,
Intercom Paging, and confirmation of Dialling by Name.
Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator. This allows
callers to dial parties by name (Dialling by Name) rather than by number. For example, a
caller can dial "S-M-I-T" (Smith) rather than Smith's mailbox number, which can be hard
to remember.
Password
A combination of numbers selected by the subscriber to protect access to his mailbox. If
forgotten, the System Administrator or System Manager can clear it so that the subscriber
can select a new password.
Personal Greetings
A subscriber can record messages to greet callers. There are 3 kinds of Personal Greetings:
(1) No Answer Greeting
(2) Busy Signal Greeting
(3) After Hours Greeting
Installation Manual
359
Glossary
Personal Greeting for Caller ID
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can record up to 4 personal
greeting messages for calls from pre-assigned Caller ID numbers. Each greeting supports
up to 8 Caller ID numbers.
Personal Group Distribution List
A subscriber can maintain up to 4 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20
mailboxes. Using this list, he can send the same message to all members of a specific
distribution list at once.
Port
The point of connection between the PBX and the VPS.
Pound Sign
The [#] key on the telephone keypad.
Private Message
A message recorded as a private message cannot be forwarded. You can specify privacy
when delivering a message to other subscribers (Subscriber's Guide Section 3.1).
Prompt
Pre-recorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non-subscribers through specific
VPS functions. The VPS supports 3 prompts: (1) System prompts (pre-recorded by the
factory in English), (2) User 1 prompts*, and (3) User 2 prompts*.
Prompts are numbered; the Message Manager can turn the prompts off and on individually.
*: freely recorded by the Message Manager
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(Available with DPT Integration only.) The subscribers and Message Manager can program
their extensions from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired
extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
(1) Forward All Calls
(2) Forward Busy Calls
(3) Forward No Answer Calls
(4) Forward Busy or No Answer Calls
(5) Forward to a CO Line
(6) Forward Cancel.
See Remote Call Forward to CO.
360
Installation Manual
Glossary
Remote Call Forward to CO
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Allows the System Administrator to program
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 as the destination to which the callers are
forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside (CO) line. This feature
must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilised. See Remote Call
Forwarding Set.
Review
Repeats a message.
Rewind
Replays the last 4 seconds of a message.
Rotary Telephone
A telephone capable of pulse dial only. Callers using a rotary telephone will be
automatically forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox.
SAVE
One of the utility commands that is used to save VPS data to a personal computer.
Scanning Messages
Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message. Another method is to
press [2] while listening to a message; this instructs the VPS to skip to the next message.
Service Mode
The System Administrator or the System Manager can change the call handling method
programmed in the Time Service setting.
Station Programming
Programming via the proprietary telephone.
Subscriber
A person who has a mailbox.
System Administration
System programming can be performed in 2 ways: (1) Locally (personal computer
connected directly to the RS-232C port of the VPS), or (2) remotely (personal computer
connected via the telephone network and the external modem of the VPS).
Note: Local programming and remote programming are mutually exclusive.
Installation Manual
361
Glossary
System Administrator
Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager, who use a telephone to perform
their duties, the System Administrator uses a personal computer to program the VPS. The
System Administrator’s handbook is the Installation Manual.
System External Message Delivery Duration Time
The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the VPS,
specified by the System Administrator.
System Group Distribution List
The VPS can maintain up to 20 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20
mailboxes. Each list is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and is
assigned via system administration. A recording into a System Group Distribution List
number will go into the mailboxes of all group members.
System Manager
(Mailbox 99, 999, 9999, 99999) The person who can perform very basic and limited system
programming using a telephone. He can create/delete mailboxes, clear subscriber
passwords when they are forgotten, set Class of Service parameters, set the System Clock,
and generate System Reports.
System Report
The System Administrator or System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to monitor
the VPS operating status as required.
TIME
One of the utility commands that is used to confirm or set the time and date of the VPS.
Time Synchronisation
(Available with DPT Integration only.) When the PBX sets a new date and time or when
DPT Integration is established, the data is sent from the PBX to the VPS.
Two-Way Recording (TWR)
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation
into his mailbox.
Two-Way Transfer (TWT)
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation
into another person's mailbox.
362
Installation Manual
Glossary
Unlimited Message Length
Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way conversations of unlimited length into his or
another person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The maximum
recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 minutes.
Voice Mail
A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to another.
Voice Prompt
Recorded VPS instructions to callers. These are either system prompts or user prompts.
VPS
Voice Processing System (e.g., Panasonic KX-TVP50).
Installation Manual
363
Glossary
364
Installation Manual
Index
Index
365
Index
A
G
Alternate extension group 150
APT integration
150
Auto configuration 151
Auto forwarding
151
Automated attendant
151
Group distribution list—personal
161
Group distribution list—system
161
H
B
Hardware settings
45, 243
161
Hold
Holiday service
162
Broadcasting messages
151
152
Busy coverage mode
I
C
Call services
152
Call Transfer No Answer Time
94
Call transfer status
152
153
Callback number entry
Caller ID call routing 153
Caller ID screening
153
154
Caller name announcement—personal
Caller name announcement—system 154
Calling a beeper 155
156
Class of service (COS)
Company Greeting
109, 156, 269
Company Name
156
Connections - optional expansion memory card
(KX-TVP52/KX-TVP54)
33
Connections - PBX
35
157
Covering extension
Custom service
157
D
Data - loading new or saved data to the VPS
126
(LOAD)
Data - saving the system data to the backup device
(SAVE)
113, 124
157
Daylight saving time assignment
Delete message confirmation
157
Department dialing
158
Dialing by name 158
Digital integration
20, 23, 53
DIP switch
17, 18, 31, 58, 61, 64, 66
158
Direct mailbox access
DPT integration
159
E
Inband Integration
162
Incomplete call handling service
Initializing the system
116
Intercom paging
163
Interview service
164
162
L
Live Call Screening
165
Logical extension
166
M
Mailbox
166
Message delivery status
167
166
Message delivery, internal
Message management
108
Message manager's guide
279
Message manager's mailbox-recording company
name
109
Message reception mode
167
167
Message scan
Message transfer
168
Message waiting notification—device
168
169
Message waiting notification—lamp
Multilingual service
169
N
No answer coverage mode
170
O
Operator service
170
P
Expansion capabilities
21
Extension group
159
159
Extension numbering plan
External message delivery list
159
External message delivery service
160
160
External message delivery status
Password administration
170
PBX Integration
170
Personal greeting for Caller ID
171
171
Personal greetings
Play system prompt after personal greeting
Port service
172
172
Private message
F
Q
Fax management
366
161
Quick setup
76, 77, 132
172
Index
R
Receive message
172
Remote Call Forwarding Set
173, 296
174
Rotary telephone service
RS-232C Parameters
243
S
Service access commands 174
Service mode
174, 267
Special feature authorization 175
Specifications 21, 148
System administration 16
System administrator's guide 179
System clock 175
System components
17
16
System management
System manager's guide
253
System reports
175
T
Time service 176
176
Time synchronisation
Troubleshooting
145
Trunk service
176
Twenty-four-hour time stamp
Two-Way Recording 176
Two-Way Transfer 177
229
U
Unlimited message length
Utility commands
177
177
V
Voice mail service 177
Voice prompts
178
367
Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). You may print out this manual
solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in
whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME.
c
2000 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Japan
PSQX2195YA KK1000CM1072
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement